Home

Chrysler 11WK741-126-AB Automobile User Manual

1. 483 484 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 206 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 108 Overdrive 4664 6 664 45 REGS Bee EHE HOHE CORSA 349 Overdrive OFF Switch ins aco 4 oa amm ew PS ws 349 Overhead Console less 204 Overheating EHgl e 2x24 em Rs 253 460 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 555 Tae rr Vat Damage 242 ub d peek teat dee Seen Paic Flam 44464060 ene heen eee 923 99 9 ees Park Sense System Rear 572 INDEX M T Brake 226624 24 e4e2 p 376 Personal Se Dl 22 69 92929225409 9 2 PR SEU d 276 POIs PTT 92 Fets MANSON ou ar beegadenan m dn ie OR ee 3 22 Phone Cellular x5 9 253 42 ek S RN EUR 2d 119 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 119 Placard Tire and Loading Information 396 Polishing and Waxing accuse wa ure eon de es 513 Power Door Locks 4 24 ded uer dra des S y e Soie S S 33 DVE TC IIT 227 Sec qc 45 lUe MNPTTC m 109 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 219 vo S264 5uG4 E nee aon eae oo 120 122 vcn M sp eeagesoes oe 972 379 Sunroof s csse mie SISSGSQ PES 212215 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 159 WindOWS nos gud o 4 RU eG ae SERES EE EP S 40 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 63 Prepatanon for Jacking oso 22 c00e5 few ened 463 Pretensioners Deal RONG 4 aeaee ood Ghee ohn eet ee es 57 Progra
2. Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the EVIC 032435760 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system the system to warn you of a possible collision with the from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This in front of you setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting Forward Hert which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Timing Feed Rit 7 VORP Timing Near DFF tar FCuJ 0 F F 032435758 i L2 Example Only 032435759 NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed Example Only in the EVIC Uc bo are ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 WMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives 56789mi X 56789mi X FCW OFF FCW Off Example 032033147 NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stat
3. 93 Child Restraint kx 6444054 RE 80 81 86 88 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 84 86 Child Safety LOCKS o recre 1404445 e503 0958 Ei 34 Clean Alt Gasol 429 9s es 3E deee ease eaas 423 Climate COnWOl 42224526226 Esa Pee did RES 320 GIG sta she won d Xue T pees ee eas 286 295 Cold Weather Operation lessen 342 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 319 Compact Spare IiE uuscoucs dee suresk y do oe es 404 Soi rcc 273 Compass amp CallbEGHOR 32s qos odes dite eie 274 COM pass Valance 44 oan uar deep weed a9 d qug d 275 Computes T3p7 Travel casas onan gee Bord ea kee 270 Connector WIC ese 309 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 309 Conserving Pile Lu gax soe gei Sor quud 133 dott 269 Console Overhead eren 204 Contract Seryic 2 6465 a veo eee ee PANES 553 Coole SVSIEN 44454 Pici teeEs ERR gees 499 Adding Coolant Antifreeze i n 501 Coolant Capacity 24s260 2508006 4494454 4 530 A INDEX 563 Coolant Level c 5bb05 4442 4044656 555 503 Disposal of Used Coolant 503 Drain Flush and Refill 5 22 2 500 MISPCCHON C M 500 Points to Remember n 504 Pressure Cap acu sore ker esp R paie oa Rd Rs 502 PaO d 22446664 OU E ween een Gas 502 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 500 530 Cruise Control Speed Control oua 54468 was 164 CUPNOIGEIS snap saa E sa Reese E e as 224 Customer Assist
4. ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 4 LOW For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 17 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 18 Fuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Ah vehicle where the fuel door is located 19 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level
5. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Im
6. i i WARNINCG Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the ti Hi HT ii HI 41 imd 44 et vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack when the vehicle is being jacked or changing the wheel 7 For vehicle equipped with Quadra Lift refer to 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher resp re ree SUE aue erat i ing for further information on disabling automatic 3 Set the parking brake leveling 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn the ignition OFF 464 WHAT TO DO IN Mate Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the p
7. in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel To Lock The Vehicle s Doors The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on the outside of the handle Outside Door Handle Lock Button With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either passive entry door handle e The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position 021909602 ees Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Never leave children in
8. 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped 033333450 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Located on the overhead console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off J 031433150 Courtesy Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer wheel is moved up to the dome ON position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push de sign Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 3 033333448 Sunglass Storage 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s batt
9. As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire
10. Auto High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Wiper Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start Assist HSA When this feature is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating infor mation To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
11. Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 48 000 miles 78 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 40 000 miles 65 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent
12. Jeep _ 2011 grand Cherokee OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyri
13. ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment 050105203 Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine pr
14. e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET Y This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON S This light will turn on when the ACC is ON For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET RS This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Power Steering System Over Temperature If Equipped If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER e TEMP message and a icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momen tarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle After five minutes the system will cool and return to normal operation Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating fo
15. for further informa tion a Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on the driver s side should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the then pull the key out with your other hand OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
16. porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 438 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer
17. s0ed eue ea es 251 AnG Theft SyS acies ei odes anh S RR Gee Reges 252 APPANNA Cle uou e veg rerai wp nup E Meu se 512 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 21 SIS TAM Ott 23934 de p 62r 9 ace ve vor uS etm 384 Auto Down Power Windows 41 Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 22992 xs 107 Automatic Door Locks 46 4 65444444 X3 RE 34 Automatic Headlights x2 3 urat e mes 145 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 324 Automatic Transmission 346 509 Addins EU iesu EARS EP ac oes on eee 511 Prac and Filter Changes 3063594 6o 509 en INDEX 561 Fi Level Check 2424454254 4520s5 452 S10 511 Hund IVC 29 3 beens eeaaoe ages 509 Special AddIDVES 245 04 e acp dedi dada ar anpra 509 Torque COnverl r oo a RSS e RUP CR CR S 952 Loja Ae PPP T eee eae as 348 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 219 Auxillary DoweroQudeb as cbca ce ence eed essi 219 Dale ctu vesdeueddued cu acie d d ead d xus 491 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 DeltS me CIRCE bes oo Fa Oe oe oe ee eos 49 95 Blind Spot Monitoring sacs eau heed oven Pd 111 Body Mechanism Lubrication 494 B Pillar LOGON o esu 316 9 tiad ERI eee dea 396 Brake Assist SYSTE 379 Brake Control System Electronic 378 Brake PIE uuug use 629 99e dpi ERE IUE eo ees 505 Blake OVSINI oy 4 340664066 64355 soe oe PS P 505 DU LoSK ABS pict skr doa dos 4 oe Pul d heir 378 Fluid Check 32r 3 bm ESQGEAASR
18. vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off service the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The in rear cargo area below the load floor vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 463 Preparations for Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces d In uh I i ili j imi Li LLLI T L 1 f T AERLE TTT LUR Hm H j l
19. 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Air Conditioning Control Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control Press this button to engage the Air ATC If Equipped Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the T blue area of the scale indicates cooler 04563345 temperatures while rotating right into e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode the red area indicates warmer tem operation Auto blower operation is set by using a peratures push button on the control unit and a comfort tem perature setting by using the temperature up and down buttons e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e The system provides set and forget operation for op Le timum comfort and convenience For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation l buttons at the same time e The system can be controlled manually if desired e ECONOMY MODE The ATC system automatically maintains the interior If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn comfort level desired by the driver and passenger OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 2 Recircul
20. 531 Roe Light 2evice Lus ues d ac Roe ORCI SUP e i CR dr di 525 LOB O DE su 3 dria ot eta e dee a 7 99 3 17d 246 525 Folding Kear Seal 2s earra meege teen ce ae BS 135 Four Wheel Drive lt 22 lt 4 602425248 5eaen 354 360 OPEO 426 e RR ERE P IERCPU PRIEST 354 DI OIBIUS ery d wes P papers te S eed ved 354 Four Wheel Drive Operation dcn en 354 Four Way Hazard Flasher 4 usu vs a6 dcm 460 Freeing A Stuck Vehiel amp 222a cR REERERSA 353 Front Axle Differential 507 lj o praeesse eee as 422 oun c 425 Clean 24 peek 5 29 483 oe Aas Y EROR es 423 COBBEFVIHE 1 3 ee boat ea ICE Ie ve E PES 269 Ea 4256 4 obey tenho es oS PIERII ES 423 Piller Cap GaS Cap 2 2204 2 6r gor ban 430 433 Galne accede XE bw hE SS ose xS m6 422 GAUDE M rm 252 Lights ic2 ee oso 4 EN ea eee Se IEEE 264 Materials Added leen 425 Au ancinS MER ITEETSETETSTIS TRITT 423 REQGUIFCMENTS ac oce doe edo ow eR ed eR RR 530 Saver VOUS 425 S40 Gos 8 X40 RA OE Pru Nu Sus 269 lank Capacity ausa t9 be POE IA ARP EAR RS 530 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles PHeLODUIUZB 22 29 7 ORC Roe rid 4 8 i 269 Fuel Saver senpsss frieriet Sue oe Ge Be 269 Fuel System Caution 4 4 ss acciai dipae oes 432 Fuses ooo he mk oo ee ee ee A Pe eS 517 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 206 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 430 433 483 Gasoline Clean Air ii 9 39 4 Re exo 423 Gasoline Fuel 234 33 EE GG
21. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm e f the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care not carry any loads on the roof rack without the fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the cross
22. Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on unt
23. Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 426 STARTING AND OPERATING M Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine IF EQUIPPED running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to forc
24. Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 556 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are f
25. Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To access the ESN SID refer to th
26. TPMS 412 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Base OV ell oos ce o hosce d unas Rp RU 415 And Wheel Tr Equipped lt s2ess dene rn 404 O Premium System If Equipped 417 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 404 D General Information 421 H Full Size Spare If Equipped is W Fuel Requirements 422 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 405 B36LEngine eee 422 EL DEED DIDI s ui pin rdc sepes Eee ep I s 406 O5 7LEngine eee eee 422 D Tread Wear Indicators 407 picsesumelcscolhm els 423 HH OF THES dapi isuuuekeg 224522229455 407 D Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 423 ELISeDIaceme nt Miles sse doce er eue Gee 408 3 E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 423 W Tire Chains Traction Devices 409 o MMT In Gasoline LLL LL LLL 424 W Snow Tires 0 ee een 411 O Materials Added To Fuel 425 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Eget System Cautions 204446204 e d 425 M Adding Fuel 99 29 bep RS URRRS 430 HB Carbon Monoxide Warnings 426 O Fuel Piller Cap Gas Gap suae em iet 430 W Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 433 If Equipped esee ae W Vehicle Loading eese 433 EE ins O Certification Label x23 ues ka bu4g4rt ote 433 B Ethanol Fuel E85 6 11 eee eee eee s Trailer Towing ACT O Foel Reguirement
27. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs 404 STARTING AND OPERATING M Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the fron
28. and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety
29. hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Supplem
30. in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e f you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporar ily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the Key Fob as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap 020207436 Emergency Key Removal the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started into the lock cylinders with either side up and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e The power window switches radio power sunroof if WARNING equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a this feature The time for this feature is programmable number of reasons A child or others could be Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter N Go in the Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate for further info
31. it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e f the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to re move the ACC sensor The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or usi
32. ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A rec
33. milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to AWD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it t
34. minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 PSI 34 24 amp 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received STARTING AND OPERATING 419 NOTE Your system can be se
35. person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 A RN Q d D e H aj 2mm WATER iH FUEL SPEED CONTROL Er system ae pO BD 3 at E v 2m lt j iu e 229 amp vr p 4 Bs AWD 8 PUEL PILL 20 REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT PRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE EC RECIRCULATYON ELECTRONIC ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHLOCK y 2 me Q TH s vik A c3 see E3 B 9 meds Uy CER amp aA amp oo s H B a cB MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PAADENGEA LEE OWNERS AM ELEctRoOme IMDMCAYOR LIONI OL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINTSYSTEM AIRBAG OFF Tne QNM uF MANUAL SC CONDMONER 51ADn TY CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do no
36. s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 ibs EXAMPLE 14 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs E l P bs EXAMPLE 2 195 lbs MEAE 5 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs amar nnna ata a aaa un 9865 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 lbs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle c
37. system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls TOW 6 Turn Signal Indicator amp The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will appear if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 7 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 9 Hill Descent Control Indicator Light If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of the Hill y Decent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off 10 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odome
38. 031509578 ag Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled 031509581 Windshield Washer Operation 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 031509578 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi t
39. 200 km h 56789 mi 040909598 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N wad through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a 040909599 personal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE BACK Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Service Tire Pressure System Service Park Assist System Park Assist System Blinded Park Assist Disabled Keyfob Battery Low Liftglass Open Left front turn signal lamp out Right front turn signal lamp out e Left rear turn signal lamp out Right rear turn signal lamp out Check Tire Pressure ESC System Off e Service blind spot system Blind spot detection unavailable Bl
40. 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 442 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Model bined Wt Rating Gross Trailer Wt Wt See Note Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of 3 700 Ibs 1 678 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control
41. 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in
42. 5 Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged 7 Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 073310728 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 2 Raise the liftgate Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate OF So 0 N DB O fe Once lower trim is loose close the liftgate Open the flipper glass Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate Continue removing the trim Disconnect the two trim panel lights 073310731 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 10 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter clockwise 11 Remove replace bulb s 12 Reinstall the socket s 13 Reverse proce
43. Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 CAUTION If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel
44. Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD Ready Alert Braking Rain Brake Support and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed trans fer case Hill Descent Control HDC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and en
45. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SEATS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the belts In a collision people riding in these areas vehicle are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down 3 The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position _ Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Power Seat Switches The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or 1 Seatback Switch down Pull upward or push downward on the front of 2 SeatSwith sth seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the directio
46. Drive Il Four Wheel Drive Models Before recreational towing perform the procedure The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU towing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to TRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of Failure to follow these procedures can cause se transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the vere transmission and or transfer case damage selector switch in any mode position Conte 454 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into NEUTRAL N WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is ful
47. E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cr
48. Equipped 236 H Rechargeable Flashlight 228 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night xX position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030434773 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated The mirror is twisted on the windshield button counterclockwise and requires no tools for mounting N Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 030434774 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Outside Mirror
49. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon hift 1 PARK n 5 iE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood aoci injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Liftgate Flipper Glass closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Ignition k d f igniti itch d a MM ree LE Information Center EVIC If Equipped e Dattery at an acceptable charge level The following messages will display in the EVIC if the e RKE PANIC button not pressed vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the MM vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds P Semis iat betes coute Dd e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote Start mode The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned e For security power window and power sunroof op to the ON RUN position eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is To Enter Remote Start Mode in the Remote Start mo
50. In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERA
51. O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 552 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 552 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee x atenta uai 992 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 553 A Seve CONOCI 4 seada 6 neers eee es os 553 W Warranty Information 554 EM MOPAR Parts sos xd ee ERU 554 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 554 O In The 50 United States And Washington D Cer eet eee err ee eee ee ee re 0 In Canada B Publication Order Forms 550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire E TDROChOB Grades 45445445 ce md tarit ners 557 Quality Grades sor ior aote bee eos d E 557 E Treadwear a oe te eae od CESSES HESS EES 557 O Jenp rature Grades 24 nds eco e rte a 558 eee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service adviso
52. Phone 119 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 057 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 309 Universal Transmitter 22 5 sob x REESE S Es 206 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 53 Upholstery Gore 24442544000 teeeee nas ogee 515 VamMily MINOMS Ge vadeeveud des d vex tae des 110 Variance COM else au eoe cn d oo iod ene d dien 275 Vehicle Certification Label 433 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vemde Loadiho sese sase aeter d sa SOR RC EUR 397 433 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 VENGO DOPE wig dcs oa eee eq nace RO ee 331 523 Video Entertainment System Rear 5eat Vid o Systemi esa dee REP be oes 316 Viscos iy ENL OC Coss sse y eae 19 S REESE 489 Voice Recognition System VR 120 Warning Flasher Hazard 4 460 Moms NOIDOV E s vas ema tota xin e qua d 5 Warnings and Cautions 008 8 Warranty Information a ud 44454 o pares de tates 554 Washers Windshield 153 496 Vase VOIE soes nme pareo veau t ea 513 Waxing and POUSHING 6465 04 rera 09e end tanis 513 Wheel and Wheel TUE se ssaa gusii nee Ties 514 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 2 ossa beens 514 Wheel IOUDIIDB ssar ais tee Rie x 4719 Ron d os 467 Wind DUENE 93 5 3 9 tee Ee Ra 43 214 218 Mandow FOSCING qo een dca Ge mue gu bdo d 330 en INDEX 579 iun CETT TDTITT 40 Windshield Wiper Blades 494
53. Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores STARTING AND OPERATING 351 normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift followed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will turn off This is a normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 6L engine or in direct gear 5 7L engine until the vehicle is brought to a stop 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NE
54. To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or fined area
55. Trim 2 Seatback ee b THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607757 E 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock T on are vee into the back decorative plastic half 2 Rearward Movement 022607497 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
56. animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver s seatbelt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON RUN position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenge
57. any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO N
58. any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protec
59. apply 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ee as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in AWD HIGH range and two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range High Range Four Wheel Drive Models or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described
60. are in close proximity should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch bal
61. be tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs 30 to 70 N m on axles with cast iron housings 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 Nm CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission
62. both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping position if equipped to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recal
63. can be readily identified by the symbol located on the seatback directly above the anchorages and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The vehicle s seat belt must be used for the center position Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all CS gt j child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat
64. child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode To attach a child restraint tether strap For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on backing then raise the armrest and att
65. conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ES eum Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be e This light o
66. control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC
67. controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee b THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or re
68. e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is impor tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst da
69. eee 422 Leaks Fluid eee 97 Lite of Tires cons eg Gas Beh ees FRR 407 eii PPP 43 Liftgate Flipper Gla ee ice ob 99 RS RS PES 44 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 234 LOREDO 2223 9 9E EE EE Y ER Sure as 97 LOS e r E e 97 144 AID se enceeoees E es 73 74 79 95 244 PUM E 4 signee amebae poe dn be enst aes 251 Automatic Headlights ius deduce ee ag as 145 PackUp PD 527 Brake Assist Watine secoesd Es irer So oboe 389 Brake Warning 5444446 ewe deh ane Hae Es 249 Plb Replacement ossea pesee at etga oes 524 CAU s e ear a Ped Ca ee eG ese poses 229 Center Mounted Stop iac uris cs ko pe EY d Ee 529 DavtIMe Running acs es via Geek eek REIR ES 147 Dimmer Switch Headlight uus x imn 144 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 389 buc e ee ose 97 POS lau pier uA beaks RC Gls ben be 246 525 USB5 6 fg 9E 3 OGG Oe eee ELETu EE PES ol Hazard Warming Flasher aeg o 6464 44 e545 460 LIOSH DO DES 2 cng 23 9 see aes oe be eee 024 525 A INDEX 569 Headlights On With Wipers 145 igh Bear Indicalo 425252542622 3 dog ds 246 Hill Descent Control Indicator 246 Illuminated Entry s ouam ek deo dom bee ess 22 LOU PHel encase RRPSTREWAGSEASUREA 264 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 244 Map Negi iaces sace qud oed ERI IS 150 GRIS e suendocad ed 929 254 7 5 9 8564054 150 204 Rede ery xoes wed equum desde caus we E S B27 Rear Tail serete Srp de ok te ee ae g
70. equipped Distance Set After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system this message will display momentarily Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Brake If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should imme diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle if equipped 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle If the ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understand ing The Features Of Yo
71. fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts c
72. for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC airbags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labele
73. front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie r
74. hook attached to the bottom of the load floor to the liftgate opening P Tether Strap A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped j NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Cargo Tie Down Hooks Y The cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is m moving Cargo Tie Down Hooks ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 WARNING WARNING Continued e To help protect against personal injury passengers e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is int
75. ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 7 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen
76. in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation 054810680 ESC OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from AWD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode 384 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may redu
77. including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e
78. information Enabling and Disabling Park Sense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or Py When the ParkSense switch is pressed to through the Customer Programmable Features section of A disable the system the instrument cluster will the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or OF display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Park Sense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled The ParkSense system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above in the Instrument Cluster s EVIC provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Service the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the C
79. interior switches for door locks power liftgate and flipper glass are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the head lights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal
80. is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stat
81. its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat r j iad collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room Fos0909670 Rear Seat Release NOTE e Do not fold the 60 rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right fold down easily outboard seat belt buckled 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Fold the dia seat ENDE forward WARNING e Becertain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children wh
82. knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ru The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and
83. knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information 80bfedf0 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION M Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
84. minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the push forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to button located at the base of the head restraint and push the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the downward on the head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head dem 030907490 Push Button 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable LIT DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907533 of a col
85. no Key Fob present in the ignition 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically un locks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the button on the right side of the chrome accent bar which is located on the liftgate below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle Liftgate Passive Entry Button 021833019 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in EVIC the liftgate and Flipper glass will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features
86. of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 920 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 MEG Audio 24 22 08 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for
87. of vehicle raised and Internal damage to the transmission or transfer the opposite end on a towing dolly case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer when towing case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission and or trans fer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 6L 481 E Engine Compartment 5 7L 00 482 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD I 483 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 483 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance PICO P T 484 B Replacement Parts llle 485 W Dealer Service se oi EET HE IE d 486 Bl Maintenance Procedures 486 misura 20 rm 487 O Engine QU PHGE a oe eeanstdews sea eee ios 490 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 914 case hx os 490 O Mamtenauce Free Battery vivas da Rs 49 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 493 E Body Lubrication L2 9e S3 RE ERR EARES E S o Windshield Wiper Blades O Adding Washer Fluid 24 zudem n 496 O Exhaust System 254 cer ek 9 9 4 OR AUR RC ieia 4
88. or A H TT 40 Windshield Wipers 224 2 he 460624 Renee ded 153 Windshield Defroster 0 0 95 322 Wipers Inleriitient xoauecpss qur Gre IS EE 4 154 Windshield Washers l llle 159 Wipers Rain Sensitive 4 0 esee uh Sea 156 Eia e con oot oo E e A obw abi d EUR E EU 496 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require
89. or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 on solid In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage will be displayed for 75 seconds For each subse quent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a SER VICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically an
90. or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 6 in 65 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 e Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1 Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 0 5 in 13 mm This position provides improved aerody namics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 99 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the Selec Terrain knob is turned to the SPORT posi tion Tur
91. or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your servic
92. position 456 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 12 Firmly apply the parking brake continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N CAUTION button or are no longer met during the four second e TN timer then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash Damage to the transmission MD ee if the irang continuously until all requirements are met or until the mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N button is released 13 Shift the transmission into PARK NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no tow bar position indicator lights will be on or flashing 15 Release the parking brake e A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light 16 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it Ea ates Gigai Toge Nave OP Decii inet away from the negative battery post Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N NOTE Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for e Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met normal
93. pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 12 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park 0Q lights or headlights are turned on 13 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat
94. pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours
95. respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or can press VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 to the next screen of data for that track Once all device or press VR button and say Shuffle ON or screens have been viewed the last INFO button press Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio will go back to the play mode screen on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio List Or Browse Mode device mode to repeat the current playing track or During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat below will bring up List mode List mode enables Off scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the 4 e Press the SCAN button to use iPod MP3 device scan L ENEE mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions track in the current list and then forward to the next in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the or song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the external USB device desire
96. rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Veh
97. special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10WK741 126 AD Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
98. system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 23456 mi FCW Message 032433107 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This avoid a collision on its own The driver has the gives you the most reaction time responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Forward Hlert Timing OFF Near D n a P Example Only
99. that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm success fully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Then either press the power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open press the lock button on the front driver or passenger door handle with a valid key fob in range or press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK button refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Disarm The System Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create condit
100. the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Front Map Reading Lights The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console IE I X 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches Ambient Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area Vill gt 033333449 Ambient Light 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the l
101. the shade switch forward for less than one second and release and the shade will automatically close then stop This is called Express Shade Close If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of the middle position the shade will move to the middle position then stop If the sunroof is not at the closed position and the shade is at the middle position the sunroof will automatically move to the fully closed posi tion before the shade begins Express Shade Close opera tion During Express Shade Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade Sunroof and Power Shade Movement Manual If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for more than one second the sunroof or shade movement will continue only as long as the switch is continuously held Whenever the switch is released any sunroof or shade movement will stop This allows the sunroof or shade to be stopped at any desired partially open position 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof or the shade during any close operation If an obstruction is detected the sunroof or shade will auto matically reverse direction to release the obstruction If this occurs remove the obstruction and then press the sunroof or shade switch forward to complete the desired close motion Pinch Protect Override Method 1 I
102. the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a hitch such as reduced detection range please see your authorized dealer for service Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving i
103. these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements d
104. tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the to remove the tire wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 12 Securely store the road wheel and jack in the cargo area 060533364 Stowed Spare NOTE The compact spare rests on a foam donut to raise the wheel face off the storage area floor 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire jack and tool kit WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occu
105. trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequen
106. transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfa
107. units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could i
108. usage prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 4 Turn the key fob to the LOCK OFF position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 5 Turn the key fob to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case N Neutral button located by the selector switch for four seconds until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The FOUR WHEEL STARTING AND OPERATING 457 DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will no longer be displayed on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 051810686 Neutral Switch 458 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash VA 10 11 12 13 14 15 Shift the transmission into PARK Release the brake pedal Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the bra
109. version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio i
110. water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be periodically inspected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The
111. 0 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with The power sunroof switch is located between the sun FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not visors on the overhead console expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or
112. 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure 7 Maximum Load Maximum load indicate
113. 3M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited
114. 4046455640 IRURE AERA 108 Heated gu tuceseree sano tears ees bees oy 110 Suo Ry 108 RGARVIOW aca ne 265 oud PSP RU eee RE UR 106 WOW gex4nae dea p45 osche ee eee ES RE 110 Mode Puel DdVGP aui dod resi penre Phe ES RE 269 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System x axes x eed 412 Mopar Jl dis 245 02339 e eR E ed eee dd 485 554 MIDE ETBE 232 23 2 8 4855542 6 hon eee ey 423 Multi Displacement Engine System 376 en INDEX 571 Multi Function Control Lever 144 New Vehicle Break In Period 92 Occupant Restraints a sucus fe chee arisi 47 72 76 Occupant Restraints Sedan 67 68 72 75 Sog c AM CC 246 TAD P TT 246 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 368 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 368 OIL Cane eei6dtDE Loose wed Sete ics nas RR e 268 Oil Change Indicator Reset 24 ome ER ERE RE 268 OU POG C m 487 Capacity M PCTC TIT 530 CU Nee DPI sucks 309 9 Rode E dra pri Res om ss 488 IDIUDSUCK a4 3 9 4 ut ba FES A bee ee EC 487 IDUISDOSM uos a ee er eee ee 490 e 24 od yo s obo eee ee ee ek 490 Pier Disposed viene bea p seed 6 Paes 490 ldentiication LOGO 44655 PE space ee PERO 488 Materials Added to liess 490 Recommendation 22s 488 530 VOINIC PC es 489 MISCOSIY 3 999b eda cet Aequi os 489 530 Onboard Diagnostic System
115. 491 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacin
116. 97 HCoolng System L2 x992 q44uEETEES 499 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M A Brake DUBIO isu thee sevens PES ES 505 O Front Rear Axle Fluid 507 Silii ace rr 508 O Automatic Transmission 509 D Appearance Care And Protection From dossier P 512 aM UG pe ke ccs eae ssir Rin heer eae 517 O Totally Integrated Power Module 517 W Vehicle Storage 06 523 W Replacement Bulbs 523 Mi Bulb Replacement sees 524 o High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID WT Equipe 3 acea 9309999 foe sh EHI ERES 524 o Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 525 ETO um Sonal essi ete pom oo eo oo oe S 525 OFront Fog Lamps 22 49 x hoe x4 SOR lt td A 529 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup ED 6 e a eee ee ee Ge ene D2 O Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 528 O Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Shin POPRE 529 O Rear License Lamp s 4d oxye ues 45 RR RR 529 M Fluid Capacities 245542255064 acca s 530 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 531 EPN DG 2 4 adeb tee BR R ERE Aq CREE 531 BA DASS 44456454464 oh oe hee ne ee RSS 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 9 8 a Q 074410741 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engi
117. A MES 505 Master C vIInd6b 4 44240 hae i635 baw Fei does 505 PoAUKiN PL a Oe a 376 Warning Light 2 u aeu em ted deg vader bee ea 249 Brake Transmission Interlock 346 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 92 D lD BODISCOIDE HU ssa dos ware riia oho ee 023 524 BUDS LI uox RueRe T da keane ane Ghee ek SS E 97 Calibration Compass oc 42 scarico Se ora dores 274 Camera Reus uu gov ew e y gr gos elo 202 Capacities Fluid 2 45444 aad sacks ee hee RUP 530 Caps Filler Duel 244444666 84353945394 19 3 92 2 34 32953 430 POW Ct DENDO s es oorr eases eugeas RO OP ee 940 Radiator Coolant Pressure 502 Car Washes ae 4 26 6606 0456 PECES FO a IE 513 Carbon Monoxide Warning 94 426 Cargo Area Cover 562 INDEX M Carco Areg Features c 325 emat rex ER SP ETE 228 Cargo Compartment oso ome o 44 bep ge d 228 hid FP 229 CACO LIC C 229 arco Tie Downe 2444665 a iot x echa oe us ao es 232 Cargo Vehicle Loading uas s qose pott in 433 Cellular Phone uus a gp suy PEU ears Eur s 119 320 Center High Mounted Stop Light 529 ie no NE e usd rase e vae edP 9 epi vet 433 Chains Tre 222 qax hee Bor oe Hon redo ores 409 Cliansine A Flat liie 3 es soe 3n es ridi turi 461 Clary TUS IVINS uro aee 3 9 402 HERE HC enews es 592 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 484 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 93 CHECKS dle FP
118. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Retractors Mode earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the Owners manual e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATC
119. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Center Console To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid storage area qo f 035209532 035209531 il Storage Compartment Latches Storage Compartment 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower storage compartment Lower Storage Compartment CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place Press in on the flashlight to release it B QU Press And Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high Cargo Storage Bins twice for low and a third time to return to off There are four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area 035410217 3ET 035409794 Rear Storage Bins Three Press Switch 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Two additional storage bins are located under the load floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor and attach the tether
120. Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 p 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 1 NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the blade holder v3 4 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder meS 072607742 wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield wa
121. Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Lights Only mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time Blind Spot Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Forward Collision Warning The Forward Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision with the vehicl
122. C Proximity Warning The Afters He Lives e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance 032433431 Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e Set Speed Change poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC Example Only The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle 032433103 Clear Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly
123. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature trailer tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Ti ps Chart CONTROL SETTINGS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS HOT WEATHER VERY HOT COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS 6 64660 646 me COLD DRY CONDITIONS im Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level lt 4 and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise oet the temp
124. D 030405533 Rear Detection Zones UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar senso
125. D OPERATING equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain system will return to AUTO Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button 058110718 Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Park Mode Indicator Lamp 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp e Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving 1 3 in 33 mm This position should be the default position for all off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result Press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 48 mph 77 km h When in the ORI position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds
126. DURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warme
127. E G9 sso E 422 COMSCEIVING greppa eee RES HEE HESS 269 Gasoline Reformulated 423 Gauges Coolant Temperature sosa ese ee rara aeii 299 e uxgeeaueeE ARR nee eee SUE TEE E EE 252 DPED see acu a etx IP d eee d guck 25 TGCHDHIGIB pee ewe seeeateeheere see ne EE 244 Scc PPP 346 Gear Select Lever Override us sues em RR oes 473 General Information 20 28 185 421 lass Cleaning LC P IT 516 Gross Axle Weight Rating es 0 00 264 454 n 434 437 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 434 436 GVW vena esentium Rus scaena 434 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 119 Hazard Warning Flasher lesse 460 Hooda DS 33 pueri ben ndanee ees RISE ee x 524 Bulb Replacement e ererat PRA SURE 525 mcum A 4p eine boys ae onda 4 eee i 516 INDEX 567 On Witi WIperS asus 9x p PEST GC EE PS ES 145 ROPICE Tr 025 Heald NOROS sos e opened oes 4 Rd hon Y Suh Eas 110 lez o P R 320 Heater Engine Block 24 5 2 gen agi a pot ures 344 High Beam Indicator usas ce rare RR RS 246 ED Descent CONGO acusa s xus d aura teg E ES s 387 Hill Descent Control Indicator 246 LOEDOIEUZISSIBE seer oe eae Cao d veg Va Vw qe a 384 Hitches Trailer TOWNE soe Qe pov 39 PEE oad ob d 441 Holder CUP 74444 bee aah wane eee ERRORS 224 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 206 Hood Release a a ee ee ae ae E 142 IGDIDON 2 45x pees oe eee ee ees eee ETE 16 NOY 624 055 rcr 14 16 l
128. ESC activation U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load 0 dards Code TIN R The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure eoe Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 39
129. Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lamps will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the 1 Remove the
130. F WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The command view sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically slide fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the sunroof switch is pressed the shade will automatically move to the middle
131. FM 101 9 Tire Pressure 28 e 29 29 X 30 NE PSI 96789 mi 041009835 Tire Pressure Display NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pressures in Starting And Operating for additional informa tion e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter N Go icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position mm Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operat ing for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the display
132. Feature i502 334 9934 45 213 oO Closing Power Shade Express 217 O Pinch Protect Override sisirirssosascas 214 O Sunroof And Power Shade Movement 4 Venting Sunroof Express aara riara 214 lur MP 217 Gonshade Operon scvacaascasaacaag 214 HU lmch Protect Feature ewe sk RRRSSVERA 218 5 Wind Buffeting sisse 214 HT ch Toed OVENS sana car Sora deor oe 218 Hans enu Le 215 O Pinch Protect Override Cancellation 218 O Ignition Off Operation 0 sende wes 215 SEE REC cubtotdiqcdesiunddaqur tutatus PIS Micosusand Vew Gannon Wik Bewereiade O Sunroof Maintenance us suce a red bbs 219 lf POUIPPCG 5 pao ui de edP adobe gei vH eases 215 E Ignition Off Operation e 223 3o 4 xm dod 219 O Opening Sunroof Express 216 E S nroot Fully Closed sse rers Sod seas agen 219 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 W Electrical Power Outlets 219 O Cargo Storage Bins 00 0000 229 W Power Inverter If Equipped 222 O Retractable Cargo Area Cover W Cupholders nnana uaaa 224 If Equipped 12 eee eee 231 _ hncp ae a ea ee TT 225 5 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 3 Glove Compartment 0000 225 Bl Rear Window Features 0 EDO Storage a cara QURE oe ee ERES 226 H Rear Window Wiper Washer 234 BiConter Console cesses LL 227 E Rear Wiodow DeltoSleP 35 3 9 ScEHE S3 295 l Cargo Area Features 00 228 E Root Luggage Rack If
133. Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper the windshield wiper blades from returning to the Operation park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031509578 Windshield Wiper Operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected
134. H child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehi
135. HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC Operation in 4WD Low Range To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in the ROCK mode The HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and HDC will function If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not function To disable HDC press the HDC switch 4WD Low Range Set Speeds e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th or D Drive 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 e PARK HDC will not function HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should turn off with th
136. ING YOUR VEHICLE 61 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seatbelts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas tened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Re minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an
137. LEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning the ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn Park
138. Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until SYS TEM displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e 5ystem OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 83 F
139. Mi Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 192 D Parksense Sensors 193 O Parksense Warning Display 199 O Parksense Display 194 O Enabling And Disabling Park Sense 197 O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist DV SLIM S Gu au oh heat ae Ae RS IET VAS 198 O Cleaning The Parksense System 193 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 199 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera lii BQUIPDEG crags raa mae e y 202 O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 203 oO Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio Bl Overhead Console O Courtesy Reading Lights O Sunglasses Storage ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 206 O Programming HomeLink 207 D Gate Operator Canadian Programming 210 0 Using HomeLink uuu scs oe odode ni 210 O Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 6 ade sce oen do ees a 210 DOCO saarena E ARRAS AREAS X aC RES E E 211 HTroublesthiooBue TIPS a sa ie she t ees 211 O General Information 3 oc docent E UC ee toe t 211 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M W Power Sunroof If Equipped 212 O Venting Sunroof Express 216 O Opening Sunroof Express 213 O Closing Sunroof Express 217 O Closing Sunroof Express 215 O Opening Power Shade Express 217 O Pinch Protect
140. Module 15 Amp Powertrain Controller Blue ransmission Controller Low High Car tridge Fuse MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Mini Fuse 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor Red 15 Amp J1962 Diag Connector Blue 20 Amp Backup Lamps Yellow 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller 10 Amp _ Powertrain Controller Red Transmission Controller 10 Amp Park Assist Module Red Climate Control System Module Infra Red Sensor Compass Module Description 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M tridge Fuse Fuse e When installing the totally integrated power mod MEE UE ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is Blue properly positioned and fully latched Failure to 20 Amp Power Outlet do so may allow water to get into the totally Yellow integrated power module and possibly result in a Red Stability Control System When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Module use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating eae The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Natural may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse 27 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition
141. N 2 qoi dS SUR siae kii 462 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped O Spare Tire Stowage ua ica a urea d een du P ER 462 W Shift Lever Override El Preparations For Jacking iex ta 463 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 473 O Jacking Inste clollS e ouem aaa eae oes dc 464 D Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB 475 o Two Wheel Drive Models 476 O Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 477 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow
142. NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF away and jam the player mechanism convertible or soft top models if equipped RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button ru a second CD if one is already loaded Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning other side is a CD should not be used and they of the current selection or return to the beginning of the can cause damage to the player previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK EJECT Button Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact dis
143. NT PANEL 243 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 041008874 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first PN turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fu
144. OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or i
145. ONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates 412 STARTING AND OPERATING These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EV E c EIE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire
146. OT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing
147. Off Draw IOD 1 e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Lami ates Gener eon lote ade oo sas 194 Grab Handle Lamps a 2 ease dene 4 L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 scar Cargo Lames do retk kerra Ee X Ed 214 2 Visor Vanity DAMP ss ad eat eos be gas V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 delltale Hazard Lamp ou aio opd OE ard rre P E CR S 74 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Lights Bulb Type Aux Aperature Backup Lamps 7440 W21W Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps W3W Front Park Turn Lamp a aao xn e aa aoe 9e e T20 Front Fog Lamps sti od RE PSX24W Front Side Marker a uou acere ee ee ee W5W Headlamps Low Beam High Intensity Discharge HID es eee Hep ae 9 975 309 3 Ede ras Dis Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp DRL 3157K Headlamps Low Bedi iun aes d keen es H11 Headlamps High Beam 9005 Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Rear Lic
148. P3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 92 160 128 144 112 MPEG Audio 24 22 08 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or dow
149. Sense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE e ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc CAUTION must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure todo e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable so can result in the system misinterpreting a close to recognize every obstacle including small ob object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in tected or not detected at all Obstacles located the instrument cluster above or below the sensors will not be detected e On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense when they
150. Start ing and Operating for further information on the vari ous positions and their intended usages NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for further information on the various positions and their intended usages Shifting Procedures 4WD HI to AWD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete STARTING AND OPERATING 357 051810685 Transfer Case Switch NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition ex ists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic
151. T 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Power Steering Reservoir 5 7L Engine MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 534 O Required Maintenance Intervals 535 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil
152. T PANEL 323 NOTE In Floor Mix and Defrost modes a small amount of air will flow through the outboard panel outlets for occupant comfort The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or the ignition switch START STOP button is cycled to OFF the recirculation feature will be cancelled
153. TING 439 WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and brak ing performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information 057007122 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 440 STARTING AND OPERATING M 057007121 057007120 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs
154. TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 clade lied Cheer sae Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Top 40 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button
155. The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in wh
156. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
157. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both
158. UTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear 3 6L engine or third gear 5 7L engine will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch may not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 gear positions will demonstrate that the transmission Rocking the Vehicle is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For vehicles If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can with 5 7L engines which have two Overdrive gears often be moved by a
159. Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARS cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to cl
160. Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M 4WD LOW to 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete NOTE e f shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Shifting into or out of WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop erly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift NEUTRAL Shift Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine off 2 Vehicl
161. White Telltale Lights s ss ssr ss acsm 262 H EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 263 PLEVIC Ked Jelltale Lights 229a ewaed voa 265 O Engine Oil Change Indicator System OPuel ECONOMY 440446 X v desc 1 4 JUR RR A yenice peed seasgar da crn E eee es 270 ETO TUG eiectum Sos deb ebat op E OR rod 270 BOOS rCC 271 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 272 m lS 24444748084 ten etn hess ab Rd 272 O Keyless Enter N Go Display IP EOUIDSBU ses 0 ens seed oe ede t 279 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See D Compass Temperature Display D Customer Programmable Features System Setup lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped D Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 293 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 00005 293 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 294 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play uia sun ee dae e isa 299 O Notes On Playing MPS TH6S uou iti 301 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 304 O Info Button CD Mode F
162. YOUR VEHICLE Driver Center Passenger e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will
163. a a ae ea ae a Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 63 AUS GAS ol ene cit tg Go m 94 J Seat Belt Extender e p MMOL VAR n pyem T ep Petiodie Safety Checks You Should Make Outsidethe Vehicle lt resaya baih negea ees 97 D Advanced Front Airbag Features 66 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON RUN position NOTE With the Keyless Enter N Go feature the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel
164. a protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control Air Direction Push the mode control buttons to choose from several patterns of air distribution Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Q7 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
165. a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
166. abilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and
167. able AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If th
168. ach the tether hook the back of the seat To access the top tether strap to the strap located on the front of the arm rest anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages 7 022633126 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached __ For center seating position route the tether strap over the l seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard To Access Top Tether Strap seating positions route the tether under the head rests THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly be hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Top Tether Strap Attachment For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel For the outboard seating positions rou
169. acks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or schedule 114 Months Maintenance _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before I Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod end
170. ance ees 551 Data Recorder Event 0 000008 79 Daytime Running Lights 133 uxo tea Red 147 Dealer Service lee 486 Defroster Rear Window 295 Defroster Windshield 95 322 329 Diagnostic System Onboard 565 584 454 544 45 483 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission S1 CUL BHOIUS Riacne ge ene oats So dee ae 487 Power OHIO s acis deeds ri piigi pee ben ea 379 Disabled Vehicle Towing x 3 2 5 44 65 248 fe da 473 Disarming Theft System zacsace ies deu ge e dob dns 22 Disposal Encme Oul 326504 64524 h 464050 R 20 4 bos 5 490 Used Engme EIS acaevaunedees Vues pes 490 poudre APRIRE 32 Door Locks Automatic 222334999 vom 34 Door Opener Garage uas sicher eee Fea d RR 206 DEMING enna s wcacs d a Botas eee eee S Fon x ee d 367 Orf Pavement 44 4 S444 029 9e 3 3 uie ed k 368 Sum uem 268 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy DVD Player Video Entertainment System 564 INDEX M Poo tUC 254259 Geeta ses aun 4 ones oes 426 Electric Remote MITOS 2544464440050 3 065 109 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 219 Electronic Brake Control System 378 Anti Lock Brake System sube cxx ves 378 Brak Acsist SYSICM o wacsedo esos poss are s 979 Electronic Roll Mitigation ved cse Sack 44 obo 380 Traction Control Systemi duse a urb ther tss 379 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM eusiom ev 3 wes 380 Electronic Speed Contro
171. and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it Ready 56789 mi amp A Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 032433097 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set A Desired ACC Speed Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed If this occurs speed e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in wap NE ETE the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the distance be NN M 55 mph tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal OE mi 032435493 ACC Set UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if e You softly tap the brake pedal Driver rm e You depress the brake pedal 3 m Cc e You press the CANCEL switch ACC 74mph e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs er e A Trailer 5way Control TSC event occurs 032435494 m e f the transmission is shifted into Neutral Driver Override e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS is off ESC will automatically be re e
172. ap Reading Lights 150 E Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 158 Eben Lich s x3 233 1uq erg were 6 der 151 lll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column EMul f ncHon Lever i299 re 3a 152 KERUP 4 acne seca Oyo 5 he oe ER eee d 159 BEBE uror ari PME 152 Mi Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 160 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Electronic Speed Control ATOA ate ovis oo Ce ee oe deo ee B To Set A Desired Speed PIG CGC Vale aed 3 3 AE oh ee bye SS ETO Resume speed ss sesaeaue es WE Sra E o To Vary The Speed Setting s xm 54 5 o To Accelerate For Passing ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC IPE OUID oro E D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation D Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC BL TO Activate ies x proe eee eer d P ERE o To Set A Desired ACC Speed ease sacro 161 EO Cancel DEP DIET 171 EL TOU OW uoo d 2e eoeS PER TE EE 172 E To Kesume Speed 446424 koe 4g hop Cen 172 B To Vary The Speed Setting 173 O Setting The Following Distance In ACC 174 D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 177 H Display Warnings And Maintenance 178 O Precautions While Driving With ACC 182 O General Information 185 D Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Consol NODE cance Ee ca 3 Qu RE P A 186 o Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 188 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
173. ard to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal opera tion ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position If the liftgate flipper glass is open the rear window wiper washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at that park position When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper will resume wiper washer functionality after five seconds Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An
174. are race eni cam QUSE eve DERE I d Before buying any restraint system make sure that it the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The second row seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR To install child restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
175. arking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued Jack Warning Label WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 CAUTION an Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools 060533361 2 Jack and Tool Assembly 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 For the front axle place the jack and protective cap on 5 For the rear axle place the jack and protective cap in the body flange just behind the front tire Do not raise the the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged rear tire Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060533362 Front Jacking Location eee Rear Jacking Location N WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 467 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface WARNING and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability do not fully
176. at will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights and Panel Lights DO To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected ee
177. ation If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for further information 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunct
178. ation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 4 Mode Display ru This display shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 5 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 A C Button 6 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning This display shows the temperature setting for the right A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON front seat occupant Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch i 7 Front Defrost Button into manual mode Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 8 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings 9 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings 10 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temper
179. ature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control OFF 13 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 14 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for both zones from the driver temperature control ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 15 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings 16 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature control button
180. ausing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should
181. ay be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving charac teristics under all normal operating conditions 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into ERS 3 third gear the trans mission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear that can be attained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed e f you push and hold
182. bars installed The load should be secured roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the a load This is especially true on large flat loads roof place a blanket or some other protection and may result in damage to the cargo or your between the load and the roof surface vehicle To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 242 Mi Instrument Cluster 243 Mi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 244 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 254 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC PISDIAVE sacar sage een Suk RARE ae eae es 256 OEVIC
183. be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire 446 STARTING AND OPERATING M replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury A
184. be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the Liftgate Glass Release vehicle 022209771 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pulling y up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate To operate the power liftgate manually in the open direction pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put liftgate into manual mode When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further information refer to Customer Programmable Features System Setup Ele
185. be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to
186. below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 e Off Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI e Normal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 e Park Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Park Mode If Park Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid If during the height change to Park Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h an
187. belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment WARNING Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest position and release the lever To return the seatback lift In a collision you could slide under the seat belt the lever lean forward and release the lever which could result in serious injury or death E Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into place Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a s
188. ble modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio volume if on will also be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is
189. c in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number
190. calibrated to deploy Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags and SABIC between you and the side airbags the performance airbags during impacts that require side airbag occupant could be adversely affected and or objects could protection be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Fron
191. ce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in t
192. ces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e Jf insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once paint a month 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Tt is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept finish clear and open 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel
193. ch step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has suc cessfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the de
194. change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535 referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire
195. cies for further information Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ee release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
196. ck feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Headlamps with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlamps Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory S
197. ck vehicle by moving between First and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode The Quadra Trac II9 transfer case provides three mode positions 051810685 Transfer Case Switch e 4WD HI STARTING AND OPERATING 355 e NEUTRAL e 4WD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the
198. cle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle e Me pen ting LAT compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments and child seats with fixed lower attachments The rear seat lower The rear outboard seating positions have lower anchorages capable of accommodating LATCH anchors
199. collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of yo
200. connect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL contr
201. ction devices require sufficient tire to body capacity than what was originally equipped on clearance Follow these recommendations to guard your vehicle Using a tire with a smallerload index against damage could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued e Install on Rear Tires Only 410 STARTING AND OPERATINC See e Due to limited clearance use SAE class S low profile cables or traction devices only Security Chain Com pany SCC Super Z6 SZ 441 cables or equivalent are recommended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued CAUTION Continued e Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good con dition are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Re move the damaged parts of the device before further use Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not driv
202. ctronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel NOTE In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo button to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away e If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position NOTE e If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button or overhead console close manual ope
203. cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to gt mb e MI install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces w 022609609 Latch Anchorages In addition there are top tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages BAALELE LT ff Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback To Access Top Tether Strap WARNING Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load floor Improper usage of the tether can lead to a failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps an
204. d SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted e Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of e the front seats NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an e authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Advanced Front Airbag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output e No objects should be placed over or near the appropriate to the severity and type of collision as airbag on the instrument panel because any such determin
205. d on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchor age bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint There are three top tether anchor ages located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 the
206. d engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine S
207. d in another collision the you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium airbags will not be in place to protect you floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im particles The particles are a normal by product of the mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con process that generates the non toxic gas used for troller ORC system serviced as well airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring
208. d that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To maintain optimal performance of your vehi cle s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always ch
209. d the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures 418 STARTING AND OPERATING e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings a The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for a
210. d the height change continues to Park Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height will return to NRH Park Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand m VCNSSNS ANN mm PACK UR IA OOOO OK US PUR peni aC a A4 053810760 Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommende
211. d track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ ous and next tracks e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display e RND button available on sales code RES radio only press the TUNE control knob to select and start Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To Exit List mode without s
212. de Press and release the REMOTE START button e The engine can be started two consecutive times with x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle position before you can repeat the start sequence for a will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute third cycle cycle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Ente
213. dial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403
214. ding in your vehicle 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant
215. ding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down ACC 74 mph hill This is normal operation and necessary to main DISTANCE 3 tain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC fer CCC gs The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me 06789 mi dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the Re 032435549 vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC Distance Setting
216. down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat Ne WHAT TO DOO IN EMERGENCIES 461 e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING sid WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood tAUHON do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for
217. ds if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes damage to the sensors may result the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Continued Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A low spare tire will not cause t
218. dure in Owners Manual For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low Terrain System Settings Not Available Raising Vehicle Ride Height with icon Lowering Vehicle Ride Height with icon Normal Vehicle Ride Height This message is dis played for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Normal Vehicle Ride Height Off Road Ride Height Level 1 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Off Road Height Level 2 Vehicle Lowered To Entry Exit Park Height This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Park Height Entry Exit Park Height in Progress This message is displayed for 5 seconds when the request is made to go into Entry Exit Height while the vehicle speed is between 15 and 25 mph This shows that the request has been recognized and will lower to Entry Exit height when vehicle is below 15 mph e Service Air Suspension System This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system The system will have limited operation at that point Immediate Air Suspension Service Repair Required This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the system which results in a complete system shutdown The system will be non
219. e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system wil
220. e Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The totally integrated power module TIPM is located in the engine compartment This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Jol 40 Amp Air J09 30 Amp E J Green Pink J02 30 Amp Power Module J10 30 Amp ma Wash Relay Pink Pink Contact J03 30 Amp Trailer Tow J11 30 Amp Drive Train Control Pink Pink Module J04 25 Amp Driver Door Node J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster Natural Pink J05 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD J06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Pump J14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Lamps Park Green Stability Control System Blue Lamps J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Valve J15 40 Amp Front Cabin Fan Blower Pink Stability Control System Green J08 40 Amp Power Seat JA7 40 Amp Starter Motor Solenoid Green Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Cavity Car Mini Description Cav
221. e in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes and when towing a trailer conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light for example sunrise or sunset is directly shining on the front of the vehicle When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section Note The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC syste
222. e Pac 28 Replacement Bulbs 44 4 2 4 5 en ES TES TEES PRSE 029 Replacement Keys sanae 5 6944 krki peti tati 19 Replacement PANS visus 238 pebra qUE SS 485 Replacement Tires uus ioco de Po ews 408 Reporting Safety Defects 32 d 9 e xe Sie a 554 Restraints Child i2 Rem 80 Restraints Occupant zoe e gteoewa ane ee dS oes 47 Retractable Cargo Area Cover Ls 291 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck usns 353 ROU Over Wirning sieri euer d r eX Pee POS 5 Rotation DHOS aues bas teen t Ed undue ad Pes ee Reo 411 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ieu uam oes 95 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 97 Safety Defects Reporting i454 5 24 pieces 9 554 Safety Exhaust GAS as duda pee ood mei ms ee 47 94 Safety Information Tire 2240455 449044 4s 64 390 Safety Tips Satellite Radio Antenna 574 INDEX M Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 316 Schedule Maintenance leen 534 Seat belt Reminder lt 2444459260404 ESOS ta 61 Seat Belts ve oes oo eR bh ee mee ded 49 95 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 54 And Pregnant Women 0000 63 Child Restraint 5 20444 uocem RI PEE Aes 80 88 Extender rP TT 63 FOMC CGAL 25043 evacuekkees 2g Te P Weg u qe 49 INSPCCHOM RM ETT 95 hurnarobno CPP ee ao aed OE es 517 Pretensioners 2 00 ees DA Reminder PP 249 Shoulder Belt Anchorage sed ezxuesu is vens 54 Untwisting Procedure as unite aces 53 o 4 ead E
223. e attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled
224. e disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Dual Zone Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 045633437 The Dual Zone Manual Climate Controls all
225. e engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds md when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop 3swai Y when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver 054903773 that caused the
226. e following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Operating Instructions U
227. e for prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION Continued e Observe the traction device manufacturer s in structions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires satisfy this require ment and can be indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATI
228. e fresh outside air into E85 General Information the vehicle The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and a gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can operate on E85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E85 Fuel Cap E85 Badge 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Ethanol Fuel E85 E85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of
229. e in front of you when you are much closer This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change FCW status press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Display Units of Measure In Operating Instructions The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped Voice Command System If Equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User measure To make your selection press and release the Manual located on the DVD for further details SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone Calibrate Compass If Equipped Refer to Compass Display for more information Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED side of the radio faceplate NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s face
230. e steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering whee
231. e stopped with foot on brake 3 Place the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED light by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is complete A To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 051810686 Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL STARTING AND OPERATING 359 NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings include an Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the Quadra Trac II transfer case The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit functions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and r
232. ean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and theref
233. eat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror in Reverse When this feature is selected the outside rearview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition s
234. eat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e some tips for getting the most out of your child Barca W
235. eat that has been overheated could cause serious Heated Seats If Equipped burns due to the increased surface temperature of On some models the front and rear seats may be the seat equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks Fold Flat Passenger Seat 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five min
236. ecially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine m
237. eck water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting 370 STARTING AND OPERATINGC ee Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid
238. ed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines N that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace
239. ed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator S This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4wD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or 4 comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar fi This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar p e Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate n flipper glass may be ajar UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 e Oil Pressure Warning Light qum This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chi
240. ed by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a which may receive information from the front impact collision severe enough to cause the airbag to sensors inflate Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may dam age the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags provide en front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only Qo bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out the right airbag board side of the fron
241. ed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL ind
242. ee Se bee ee ed bee TE ee ee as 120 POVISHNCRE peerk 045 5044 04 24 oe eae a bss 125 Clegg 1 c3 9 ERE ooo neta as sets 515 Ide EDUT ai dot eod EE sade AR Sei eS 141 MOOD wie 4454264 pree bE ou RE ORA ERES 138 lo c ACT 120 122 Gar POUND seriea ropr Xeon Deor dad d db 135 simi PC eA 126 securi Against Theft 244284 ihe Reg x akiratis 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 252 Selec Tenma uso amp wos s XO eR eee PEG RP Es wd 360 Selection of Oil llle 488 Sentry Key InmmiobIlIZet oap dex sme toes 18 Sentry Key Programming xo eser nm doe ec 20 Denm Key Replacement uu 9 aic ase 9259 9 9 99 19 Service Assistance llle 551 Service CONTAC pes eue pas ae ee Se ie ee BO 553 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lesen 244 Service Manuals lt 4 2444 4 4 oh464 4 484 4444 555 Setting Te Clock xgues x s 955 136 Hn GOR 286 295 Detinps PersOldl s osx dares Pi ERES RS 276 Shift Lever Override 0 0000 eee 473 en INDEX 575 i 644 C I 345 Automatic Transmission 345 Shoulder Belts x 4 654082 865600244 06 048 ESA 49 DIGGS S oss Rx SER hen ba p Vespa Re don EO E OR eee 74 apode FUT odode Egon adora Spa 07 246 525 527 Sirius Backseat TV Uconnect studios 316 SmartBeams 225 2044664 cane 559229 209 25 8 146 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 409 SNOW PIOW x c guae a wem metuercgesewgs 450 Snow Tires 125444999 we
243. efer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any
244. eft side of the steering column 031509530 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the left side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window
245. el economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC
246. electing a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 CAUTION Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Uconnect phone system supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufactur er s guidelines ing Audio Placing items on the iPod or external USB device ru or connections to the iPod or external USB device Play Mode in the vehicle can cause damage to the device When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can and or to the connectors start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to Uconnect 1 J WARNING phone system Seven devices can be pai
247. elp protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents
248. em is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The EVIC consists of the following EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays instrument cluster e System Status Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display Outside Temperature Display NE 83 F e Trip Computer Functions FM 103 5 Fuel Economy ACC
249. emergency key by sliding the mechanical ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lamps your thumb and then pull the key out with your other and horn will remain on hand Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back 020207436 housing or the printed circuit board Emergency Key Removal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021334199 Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot 021334198 Separating RKE Transmitter 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4
250. en the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Rear Seat Folded system To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the WARNING outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the at the desired position To return the seatback lift the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest lever lean forward and release the lever In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Rear Seat Release 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable steering wheel posi tion if equipped and the radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed 031109590 Driver Memory Buttons Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One or
251. ended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or acci dent a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the left side of the steering column 036409579 Rear Wiper Washer Control A Rotate the center portion of the lever upw
252. enition Key Removal 4452444544444 9 amp 3 094 16 Illuminated Entry 568 INDEX M Immobilizer Sentry Key 44545544924 3A P FIMES 18 Infant Restraint 25x RR S 80 81 Inflation Pressure Tires 2 scu dod ek oe os es 401 Information Center Vehicle 254 Inside Rearview Mirror Ls 106 Instrument Cluster een 243 244 Instrument Panel and Controls 242 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 516 Integrated Power Module Fuses 517 Iuterior Appearance Cafe us ueste anita pia 515 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 154 IaMOGUCHOM uu be eho e485 eet hed ee che Ede S 4 Inverter Power 0 0 0 0 eee ee 225 Jack Location 4 4e decir dem gm e Red ae e 462 Jack Operation ser sue Ropa RE RUE epe ere bu 461 464 Jacking INSHMUCHONS x sce saepe E ESRB RS 464 JUMIp State setetenst 3E ETUR ORE ERU RR ER 468 Key PIOC MN 4c ax ace si Evo RP WOES TIRE 8 d 20 Key Replacement enpres ecu baa f be dq ree RS E 19 Key Sentry immobilizer soie 6 05 card eee ee des 18 Keyl Reminder iayaseS lt e4e4de0dm BEEE vas 18 Keyless Enter N Go sass dash vena diss 36 273 340 Keyless Entry System ascenso eee 05056 Yd x s 23 Keyless DO gu44 Gen aeeaeareta esa oe RE 14 273 oe a ee ee eee eee ee 14 Lap Shoulder Dells 32 4 4 aces rur porri d d 49 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 64 86 E PEI es 97 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000
253. ense Lamps ei cia dee meane Oe W5W Rear lurn Stop Tail Lamps o sau sc t9 ves 3057 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch
254. ental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and
255. er steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of
256. er will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders T
257. erature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost S Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Set the Mode control to Floor d If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor Or Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 51352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS aM Starting Procedures uuu emos odie Hae dees 339 W Automatic Transmission 345 O Automatic Transmission 24 4 4399 neis 339 H Key Ignition Park Interlock HKevless Enter N GO 4 seas eee aruchare 9 i use 340 D Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System E NODBBIOLODEBINE sserrep pinak ee eas 341 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission O Extreme Cold Weather HGeqr PiN OS cs sa cha ee te ehet ee a hawes 346 oe up OE eee ane nee Gees ote El ROCKE The Vemicle 224454553 tinit
258. erefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed e To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing 031409529 Headlight Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further inform
259. ery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels 034033576 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accu
260. es Sub hee ee eS eH ES 411 Ope Te sisse to a tb anesa ea P RE 404 405 462 Specifications Fuel Gasoline MP 422 Oily Lu usw 3b mE tees e teeeeeeua as 488 Speed Control Cruise Control 161 164 Jenn e ee 291 viris PET 28 339 Automatic Transmission 339 Cold Weather 4 x32 4 Booed be oe ES 342 344 Encine Block Heder ua gw y Pep E tS HE is 344 Enone Past Stat saree 90e PE dCRRR ER a4 343 Irc dec ee ns eae See eee eee ee 28 Starting and Operating sace x ador xx boe bus 999 Otarung Procedures pece ria rasati dot ee 999 Steering FOWEE ace 64a 4 40 662 0480S O45 eee 372 070 Tilt Column i RR 64 6245 158 159 Wheel Heated ue sete ueEMPSWescxECEaES 160 Wheel Tif 2229 4 wx be ee Ree RS 158 159 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 318 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System denn ECT 318 uc AC C 929 vnius C 391 523 Storing YOU Vehicle sses ses reisseri is OG oes 925 S n ROO 4 6 634454 ooh se Oe Bees oe eo Ge 212 215 San Visor EXEOBISIORE 4 44 656 3 45 hisce PR SOR RH 110 Sunglasses Storage 576 INDEX M Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 63 DUISDEISIORL Al erir Wea geese oan E ERER 362 Sway Control Trailler sas eer eco ene anei 384 DyBtBega c Eng me CH uc oce ne phates senda vee x 489 oystem Remote Starting vido dase eo ae db aves 28 TERON 4522 aus see eee ee hones aes 244 Telescoping Steering Column 158 159 Temperature Control Au
261. eveloped during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 430 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this CAUTION vehicle 1 Press the fuel filler door release sw
262. ey Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift or towing dolly en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 477 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used vehicle on a flatbed or with one end
263. f a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing of the sunroof or shade press the corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal motion ends After two seconds all closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch Protect disabled This will allow the sunroof or shade to move towards the closed position Method 2 If three consecutive sunroof or shade close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override Cancellation Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate In addition if any other switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade away from the closed position Pinch Protect will reactivate Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a
264. features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espafiol French Frangais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection p
265. fore pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate For Pa
266. freeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen
267. g the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs R
268. g until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control
269. ght 2010 Chrysler Group LLC A o m O INTRODUCTION Z rri X sj e esI e o e e Ls Le UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ce ec cc wwe eee www were enn SIARTING AND OPERATING 4 53 63 RC GCSE UR UR 444 CONS RR ROSE Cae aS TABLE OF CONTENTS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee nnn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 2 enn CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 5 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle it can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive
270. ght remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g s
271. gine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor ca
272. gue Weight Trailer Weight 443 Torque Converter Clutch uiu den rack es eca 902 Tow Hooks Emergency uae ade reed vases 472 Tow Haul Indicator Light vawavees fe add 995 246 jon Aa 436 473 Disabled VNE y guru oath tt deed oa D UR 473 ton d PEE 442 RecredHOnal s xu sd oues fo pees at cera ROSE dcs 451 lr 244 phe eee eat tag bee eee ee meas 442 WaChOn COBLEOL dicis qoe sos td qae ebraica oes ws 379 Trailer Sway Control TSC 00 384 Tailer OW 25 054 s bes 3 ee sera erence es 436 COONS Systemi TIPS 4 4 4 obice nese hes be os 450 inii garb Hr 441 Mimin RequireflentS ad dc RR eg 444 Trailer and Tongue Weight 443 VI 22384 24a ee eee Cee oa ee ee ee 447 Trailer Towing Guide sie cs kod adap e Rondo dre 442 Maer MOIS a 4 44 isrnieu 212 9 979 2 Quir d qn Cates 442 Uransien Case EMT 508 Mamin onse aes xa wee eee fus d 508 Transmission Automatic gaechcecded coeee 4 ee eyes 346 509 MaIMtENaNC iu3e4 4 94e eee shee tree reda 509 SHINS eeraa Aue re OG oe ee eee OS 345 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry eaux uda co eadear ea ee 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 206 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry sues os 44 544440454 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Tread Wear Indicators 64 0244 5344544844589 407 TOO SIONS er 246 525 527 578 INDEX M WEECOMMECOD 2 544405 bens oun Idea d d bus 309 Uconnect Hands Free
273. gvawes 124 122 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 138 O Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To MOMOD 139 O Memory Position Recall LL 140 D To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To MO PERDE 140 O Easy Entry Pat DEBE 6404059464 echter 141 W To Open And Close The Hood 142 MICS a4 xis ax Yun EE ee RE SUR 144 O Headlight SWC our awe de tae he hee ees 144 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 145 o Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 145 LH Smartbeam If Equipped 146 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 o Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 147 O Lane Change Assist os 64 5 eu 6 RO 9s 152 3 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID OFlash To Pass llle 152 Headlights Only 3 3 2 04 xot eee tanai 147 5 High Low Beam Switch 153 AHeadight Delay 4 63 2 Sia echa sra ves 147 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers O Parking Lights And Panel Lights 148 3 Windshield Wiper Operation oO Fog Lights If Equipped 148 O Intermittent Wiper System 154 anterior EIS BIS 5244245444 44 653 oe os 149 3 Windshield Washer Operation 155 O Lights On Reminder a uu conce iem ey oa os 150 O Mist LL LLL LLL LL LLL LLL Lu 156 A Pattery Gaver x uceutanuor pa SHE OP UA RR RR d 150 D Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 156 DO Front M
274. he Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning message to appear or the chime to sound V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster for 5 seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system 416 STARTING AND OPERATING xe will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message may be displayed for approximately 5 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will sound If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices
275. he indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat ea
276. he intended direction of travel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 386 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailerona HSA Off hill and this co
277. he radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of M
278. heck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCE
279. her Vehicle Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions e Transmission in PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED e Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED dt NOT ALLOWED NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or loss of proper tie down tension 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place the transmission in PARK 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly followi
280. hicle unattended e With Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthor ized operation When the alarm is activated the
281. hould not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most effi cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
282. ht 434 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size
283. ically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC press the HDC switch or put the Selec Terrain system in ROCK mode ROCK mode is only available in 4WD LOW range et Hill Descent Switch 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M When HDC is enabled the HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level when necessary on grades greater than approximately 8 It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released
284. icator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 5 2 6 wd 7189 LA 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the RETURN button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall
285. ich crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child s
286. icle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Anti
287. icle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it 2 cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection lock all doors when leaving the ve
288. ight wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer 360 STARTING AND OPERATING case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains 051810689 Selec Terrain Switch Selec Terrain consists of the following positions e Sport Dry weather on road calibration Only avail able in 4WD High range Performance based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with im proved handling and acceleration over a two wheel drive vehicle The Electronic Stability Control will set to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintain ing safe handling controls The vehicle will lower if equipped with Air Suspension to Aero Mode in High Range 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode if AWD Low is selected the Selec Terrain will auto matically switch back to AUTO Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose tract
289. ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient ma
290. ii 374 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 O Power Steering Fluid Check 545 2 4 375 ll Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 376 M Parking Brake sse seserirartiitiros sees 376 W Electronic Brake Control System 378 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 378 O Traction Control System TCS ss 264 44 379 G Brake Assist System BAS 379 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 380 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 381 H Trailer Sway Control TSC iceee2 3x Gees 384 O Hill Start Assist HSA 384 o Ready Alert Braking If Equipped 387 oO Rain Brake Support If Equipped 387 O Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transter Case Only usas aree soe sense 387 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light iss cs 389 W Tire Safety Information 390 D Tire Markings O Tire Identification Number TIN 394 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 395 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 396 Mi Tires General Information 400 Gee Pree eae eeuduae denotes e ewes 400 O Tire Inflation Pressures 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 403 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 411 ORadi l Ply EOS as ee oon diine Be Res 403 W Tire Pressure Monitor System
291. il the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System
292. ile filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the left rear storage bin cover 3 Pull the release cable STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines S that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weig
293. illed with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE See Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditi
294. in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio volume is also reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a hands free system that allows you to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in your mobile phone Press the Uconnect Phone button e on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped and follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone Refer to Uconnect M Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED WARNING Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR button vr located on the radio or steering wheel e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or controls if equipped outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User ee are more Hke y LO DOSeHDusD anjarag Manual located on the DVD for further details i T
295. in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injuty life and or prevent the engine from starting a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 473 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 3 Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder located next to the shifter on the center console 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remo
296. ind spot system off Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked Normal Cruise Ready When Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC system is turned off and Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Adaptive Cruise Off When the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system is turned off Refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Ready When the ACC system is activated Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Set After setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped ACC Cancelled To disable the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Sensed Vehicle Indicator The system detects a slower moving vehicle in the same lane Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if equipped Driver Override If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the ACC system Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle if
297. indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle
298. ings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021408059 Key Fob with Four Button RKE Transmitter 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This featu
299. ion ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C F R Part 15 515 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph 40 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
300. ion ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the
301. ion lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal opera tion of low beams ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay th
302. ion surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Normal Ride Height NRH if the transfer case is in high range The level will change to Off Road 1 if the transfer case is in Low range Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH Sand Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud sand or wet grass Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control manage ment of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Off Road 1 Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range The vehicle is raised if equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearance Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use on high traction off road surfaces Activates the Hill De scent Control for steep downhill control Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If 362 STARTING AN
303. ionary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un avallable screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi ACC FCW Unavailable Warning 032433104 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignitio
304. ions to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of
305. ions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally sound the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then opening the door Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter pull on the front driver or passenger door handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information with a valid key fob in range or press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is removed and rotate it to the ON RUN position ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock any door They will remain on for approximately 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Sett
306. ior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFE ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the
307. ir 999 Mu GHA rane HAR owners eaten eae W Four Wheel Drive Operation 354 BL ATIS AOE sos deest sea eee eee EE ks 344 D Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 344 Precautions If Equipped is ms 354 334 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee O Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 42mm ren 355 ASHE OSIHONS i 4556 es 264 oe HAE bed 356 O outing Procedures ua ous x dora abus RR Pur s 357 D Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 909 W Selec Terrain If Equipped 360 ELDESCHDUIDIE uae 56 3 R wd yee oo TS IRE 360 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages 362 ll Ouadra Lift If Equipped 362 upp edo P 362 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Mes ages dui vee e ma 365 APENN torrets oes eee eee hors ass 365 Mi On Road Driving Tips 367 E Off Road Driving Tips sesso kw ERR ds 368 O Quadra Lift If Equipped 368 o When To Use 4WD Low Range IPEOQUIDDEG pieeo vv dese eee Pod dh dps 368 oO Driving Through Water is kam ene 369 O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 370 CUI aa d v9 Gaye oa P 93 9 f ope o 370 Traction Downhill e seas acm ir es 371 O After Driving Off Road sau e i s Rok ined os 371 W Power Steering ccnesessesdees oe seres 372 ESL ENGING wadbtbe go bed d erka RE ede d 372 ESL BDEIH 4 dader d 9 iik taa k
308. itch located under Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol the headlamp switch compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability STARTING AND OPERATING 431 056810677 056810679 Fuel Filler Door Release Switch Fuel Filler Cap 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler cap 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground wh
309. itch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on th
310. itch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or 4 f using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery Jump Starting Procedure Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission WARNING ee Pavan E eee ID Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex cal accessories plosion a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 471 CAUTION WARNING Failure to follow these procedures could result in P onetconneer tye caple I ane ie pane DOSE Orme damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 5 Sta
311. ity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control M2 20 Amp Electronic Limit Slip Blue Module Powertrain Yellow Differential Air Suspen Control Module Trans sion mission Range M3 20 Amp Liftgate Headrest J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor HI Yellow Yellow Low Natural FE a EID WE Pink Yellow Blue trol Yellow chable Natural Yellow Steering Wheel Blue Yellow 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 Amp Video Universal Garage M15 20 Amp _ Power Seat Module s Blue Door Opener Yellow Adaptive Cruise 10 Amp Heating Ventilation amp Control Audio Red Air Conditioning Cli Telematics Daytime mate Control System Running Lights Relay M12 30 Amp _ Radio Amplifier Air Suspension Green Module Instrument Cluster M13 20 Amp Instrument Cluster 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con Yellow vm Y RRINE Red troller BM a ee ee M19 25 Amp Automatic Shutdown 1 Yellow Natural and 2 M20 15 Amp _ Instrument Cluster Blue M21 20 Amp Automatic Shutdown 3 Yellow Cavity Car tridge Fuse Mini Description Fuse Horns Red Right Horns Low High Red Left Rear Wiper Natural 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor Yellow Output Diesel Lift Pump Export Only 10 Amp Driver Door Switch Red Bank 10 Amp Ignition Switch Wireless Red Control Module Keyless Entry
312. ive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper sw
313. iving NOTE involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to conditions Your complete attention is always re maintain a preset following distance while matching quired while driving to maintain safe control of the speed of the vehicle ahead your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects i e a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions You should switch off the ACC system into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driving e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i
314. just a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 030409528 eae Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 a Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle IE
315. ke pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally 16 The Keyless Enter N Go button if equipped may now be reinstalled if desired Refer to Starting Pr ocedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Oper ating for further information Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flashers 460 WijumpeStarting llle 468 lB If Your Engine Overheats Ln 460 O Preparations For Jump Start 469 B Jacking And Tire Changing 461 H T p St rt ng Procedure ix uoc ad dares lack LOCATO
316. key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is esp
317. l Cruise Control 161 164 Electronic Stability Control ESC sm pen 381 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC v ened ee geese eee vee ates E dh 246 254 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When SIR uias edem ds 959 Hazard Warning Flasher 460 Jac dg usns teas beet ha PRENDI ee eS 461 JOM rare wot eee eke E eet ee SG 468 TOW Hooks 2209 8d PE EB eeu dos Ge oe eS 472 Emission Control System Maintenance 484 Engine Pir Cleaner pent eee ae ess Beebe es eee 490 Block Heat r ssn Gated Ron 89 duh cap dened 344 Break In Recommendations 92 COMPATIR 2 x ado 86 Fan 9 6 39 Parens 481 482 Compartment Identification 481 482 Su APT r 499 Exhaust Gas Caution 47 94 426 Fane TO OA PP 343 Idooded AE esenea n eee 343 Fuel Requirements ich aa es a RRERARX A Ea 422 530 Jomp ane gia voe sx spna bon o sedes x 468 Multi Displacement 0 6 376 OW e bas 5d web Re oe ea eae Behe ee 487 530 OU Change Mierval ux s ear eeT EE PESE 488 OIL Disposal 1 3 2209 FSGS RS OE oe ambia 490 ILEHGE oie 4458sn05s aot eangeeace ane 490 Oil Filter Disposal sds qur EE OPI REP SERIALS 490 a INDEX 565 Oil Selection usu eni REESE 488 530 Gub nici gait shop dus ep ans bee pe 489 COVEIDISQUBIE 2 ados pes dap d eee ets a riot 460 riso M PC 339 Temperaire Galige uera deca iba ced ee 4 vds 253 Exieie Oil VISCOSIDY 222 2sn eeutereecene
318. l assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone 1 ft 0 30 cm ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m ft or greater 1 m or greater ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check careful
319. l memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur bef
320. l switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator 031705825 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 032209540 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL Electronic Speed Control Buttons When engaged the Electronic Speed Con
321. l vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool e the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM message and a flashing icon are displayed on to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e Even if pow
322. ld or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high unless the blower is controlled manually NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e If the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by
323. le slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate I I i l l i Overtaking Passing i i l l i I Overtaking Approaching 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of o
324. lision and could result in serious injury or pe Active Head Restraint Tilted death NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift f n upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they ward on the head restraint to lower it are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After Rear Head Restraint returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable 030933142 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in
325. llite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details iPod MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RER REN RBZ REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio iPod MP3 control feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual iPod MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment iPod MP3 control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software ver sions may not fully support the iPod MP3 control features Please visit Apple s website for software up dates 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e C
326. losed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Press and hold both the Up and Down buttons simultaneously between 5 and 10 seconds a message will appear in the EVIC stating leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons have been released Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Driving the vehicle over 5 mph 8 km h will return the air suspension to normal operation Refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Electronic Vehicle Infor
327. lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Rear Wiper
328. luid Level Check 3 6L Engine will result in more frequent fluid and filter Regular fluid level checks are not required For this changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu reason the dipstick is omitted ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 Fluid Level Check 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear posit
329. ly behind your vehicle and be sure to CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob her shoulder when using ParkView structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens CAUTION Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only LP the ar ee Press the menu hard key be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key drive path 3 Press the camera setup soft key Continued 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key
330. ly in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK 2 Turn OFF the ignition 3 For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go remove the Keyless Enter N Go button and use the key fob to complete this procedure Refer to Starting Procedures Keyless Enter N Go in Starting and Operating for further information 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case N Neutral button located by the selector switch for four seconds until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to N Neutral is complete A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL mes sage will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 455 051810686 Neutral Switch 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in the unlocked OFF
331. m DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph 40 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When in Four Wheel Drive Low e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 To Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden Adaptive Cruise Control tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control
332. mage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or
333. mation Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met i e engine running doors closed speed
334. me will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the li
335. metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Materials Added to Fuel CAUTION Continued All gasoline sold in the United States is required to CAUTION Continued contain effective detergent additives Use of additional n out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition detergents or other additives is not needed under normal malfunctions can Cape the catalytic converter to conditions and they would result in additional cost overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Therefore you should not have to add anything to the some light smoke your engine may be out of tune fuel or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions CAUTION
336. mmable Electronic Features 276 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry aues cbrxRERISRR Sx 23 Quadra Lili ace rye ce xw dq Irae Vw dy sm Ed 362 Quadra Trac ERR ee ea de RE Phe Baan aS 354 355 Kadia Piy Ties xus acie x marea tiapakan 403 Radio Operaio accu ease 1 cereo Haba ee aa 320 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 316 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 2 es 156 Rear Axle Differential 4 06600025 784 s 507 Kod Camera rekstri REX E OEE ind e ed 202 Ica C OS 30 642440246 ap dde IE Yo Some 117 Rear Cupholder 4 2024416 dor 48 ode krei peta 224 Nn INDEX 573 Reat Park Sense DYSTEDI 4i4 3eunee peste ss 192 Ream ocd PORHOPS 292920 09 9 9 404 bo Sod d 199 Rear Window Defroster usn 29D Rear Window Features llle 234 Rear Wiper Washer 242 5 464 geass d dcs 234 Rearview Mirrors 4x3 xo 3X ROO 3 Roe ES 106 Reclining Front Sedis sre 9i Ee edad etats 126 Recorder Event Data 0 00048 79 Recreational TOWING 3 a eacra sue dua Gee dod ees 451 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 454 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 456 Reformulated Gasoline llus 423 I rario MC 494 Reminder Seat Belt leen 61 Remote Control DIGEDBS SYSTEM scs doe ERA spia whee eas ees 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 2 202 2t ober Rs 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 318 Remote Starune SYSTE sche apaa mo
337. monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the f
338. move the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counter clockwise 045633350 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode ugh Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window xf demist outlets This mode works best in co
339. mpede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup port Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support Power Lumbar Switch 030909539 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment Some models may be equipped with manual front driver or passenger seats The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor Adjustment Bar While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
340. n 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Maintenance Sched ule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 5 7L engine Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency 450 STARTING AND OPERATING M Cooling System SNOW PLOW To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment heating take the following actions should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving WARNING Reduce speed Do not add a snow plow winches or any other Air Conditioning aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle Turn off temporarily This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured STARTING AND OPERATING 451 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Anot
341. n curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 SARS Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Informat
342. n cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected
343. n electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 Kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 5 stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven pin connector brakes when you need them and could have a at the rear of the vehicle and a four pin harness located collision under the rear bumper The four pin har
344. n it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The cap
345. n of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or backward Push the seatback switch forward or rear ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Continued WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Passenger s Power Seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
346. n the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode
347. nce Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling
348. nce listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not
349. nced Front Always wear your seat belts even though you have Airbags room to inflate airbags Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle Continued has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC and Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags SAB airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal colli
350. ncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selecta
351. ne Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 071410750 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be perform
352. nerator to recharge the vehicle s battery CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life back of the center console to convert DC current to AC and or prevent the engine from starting current This outlet can power cellular phones electron Continued ics and other low power devices requiring power up to ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The power inverter switch is located on the switch bank below the Climate Controls T
353. ness must be Continued nclipped before use Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector 448 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations OTTO O70 O Q 79 Md Four Pin Connector Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 057003766 75 X o O A bo od o 7 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or selecting a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more tha
354. ng the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position 7 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the battery post CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac l9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL N position in the transfer case ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or CAUTION vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require Tow only in a forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case The transmission must be placed in PARK for ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II recreational towing Quadra
355. ng any tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be available The cluster will display the warning ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sen JJ SOT To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assembly the bracket back to the beam is 6 6 ft lbs 9 Nm ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service ACC Warning If
356. ng studios NOTE SIRIUS Backseat TV service is not available in Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD RER Navigation RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multi media User Manuals for detailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Remote Control Location Lowering the Display Screen 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes avail
357. ngaged Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled 96789 mi 032433100 Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn OFF the ignition e You switch off ESC e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 32 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation This could cause a collision and or serious injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and hol
358. ning the Selec Terrain knob to the AUTO position will return the system to normal operation 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Park Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 5 in 38 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Park Mode press the Down button once while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Park Mode change will be cancelled To exit Park Mode press the Up button once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further information The system requires that the engine be running for all changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is c
359. njure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners SAB and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
360. nly shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front seriously or fatally injured wheels toward the curb sd downhill grade and iss d Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking child could operate power windows other con brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise trols or move the vehicle the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction
361. nner N ter Fuel Economy AVG 99 9 RESET UTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 200 C E ami 041009379 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the
362. not tap the shift lever to the right the transmission will exit the gear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read D 3 6L Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the dis play will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into third gear 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with the 5 7L engine use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional under drive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap to the left will display ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 the ERS designation for the current gear the transmis sion will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE po
363. now plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the
364. nted seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Horn with Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lo
365. o To Lock The Doors 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME D Remote Open Window Feature IF EOUIDDOG 4442 dote bare toe een eens PUER 25 o Using The Panic Alarm as aoa 654504044045 25 O Programming Additional Transmitters 26 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 O General Information iH 1640 4665 4446 28 28 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 28 O How To Use Remote Start 29 lg Door Locks 0 ee 32 O Power Door Locks lees 33 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOS PP 34 W Keyless Enter N Go 000 00005 36 B Windows D Power Windows 395 29 a o Wind Buffeting W Liftgate O Liftgate Flipper Glass O Power Liftgate If Equipped ll Occupant Restraints O Lap Shoulder Belts O Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage O Energy Management Feature O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 54 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 H Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 72 PPLE arii naa enya eit 9p D Event Data Recorder EDR 79 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 22432 94 49 50 exe 57 Child Restrainis c LL Lecco uuu 80 2 a Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 92 ATR RINE INE P aa ErScatbelb Lock UE Sosa waa we w reserare e 63 a a
366. o the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damag
367. o turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet 035005840 Off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers To avoid serious injury or death located in the center console Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 035133386 Front Cupholder Location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE located in the fold down center armrest Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035133143 Rear Cupholders Glove Compartment 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To open the glove compartment pull outward on the Door Storage latch and lower the glove box door Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access 035209525 Opened Glove Compartment Door Panel Storage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FE
368. ob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door Ap 021809601 Manual Door Lock Knob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in juries and death NEN pe 021809604 Power Door Locks Power Door Lock Switch The power door lock switch is located on each front door If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the
369. obstacle Rear Park Assist Display 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status Rear Park Assist Disabled Rear Park Assist ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Fast Tone Slow Tone 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Continuous Tone 032809219 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone pee Detected Detected Detected d mene Flashing Flashing RdioMue No Ys Ys Ys Yes NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when Sound and is Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa the system is sounding an audio tone tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further
370. od ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O C O O O G O C C O L L Li L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L
371. of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC White Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white telltales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Amber Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber caution telltales For further information refer to Elec tronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 22 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Red Telltale Area This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell tales For further information refer to Electronic vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off ee OFF 24 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 25 Temperature Gauge WARNING The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling syst
372. of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 444 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operat ing for further information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintena
373. ol knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Sate
374. ology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location oy 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 This placard tells you importan
375. ombination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 560 INDEX M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 164 Adding Fuel 430 Additives Puel arieso amre Eae T 425 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 490 Air Conditioner Maintenance Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Controls Air Conditioning Operating Tips Air Conditioning Refrigerant Air Conditioning System Air Filter Air Pressure Tires Air Suspension AUDA cha Tet eae Ve XE aS SAT ET 63 75 Airbae Deployment asi a t doe deae gx 76 Airbag lien 24 p44 sax bck es d Rt 73 74 79 95 244 Airbag NaMCNANCe 5424460055608 RR PSP ees 78 Ide ONS uses EE qeS Eu d aes 67 72 4 75 Airbag Window Side Curtain 68 72 75 Alarm Pani escris ob en BS ee SG S RAU SS P 29 Alarm Security Alarm xad geehrte 20 252 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio 00 306 Antifreeze Engine Coolant uu 2 iu sad Sire ds 530 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 378 Anti Lock Warning Light saxis
376. ommunication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to h
377. onnecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compart Center Console USB AUX Connector Port ment ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod MP3 control system iPod or exter nal USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connecto
378. ons on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in c
379. ontrol Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Ra
380. operational at that point Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height This message is displayed in advance warning to the driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower preset position unless the speed is reduced Selected Ride Height Not Permitted The vehicle speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels Entry Exit Level Off Road Ride Height Level 1 Off Road Ride Height Level 2 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait This message is displayed if the compressor tempera ture level is too high Level control is suspended until the compressor has cooled down Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open This message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and level control is suspended Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change Aerodynamic Ride Height This is displayed for 5 seconds when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody namic Height 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status P R N D L 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Oper ating
381. or MP3 Play 304 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio I DOUIDDOH x sace draere xo dO S oso hi ere 305 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped 309 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 la iPod MP3 Control If Equipped 309 W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 318 H Connecting The iPod Or External USB aRadio Operation sa oe ny oot SOR eo ee d 318 Bo LL 310 OCD Player n n anauona ese 319 bem Wie BOSE uas uae eee oa ns 311 BI CD DVD Disc Maintenance 319 TRE Re OS sp Radio Operation And Mobile Phenes soos GPlay Mode oo oaaao 312 B Climate Controls ssss O List Or Browse Mode aO Es 313 eri E Heating And n NEM 320 O Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 315 3 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control lll Uconnect Multimedia AIC I Bouipped 22 05 1o mo 324 Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped LE Operating Tips 0 0 0 0 essen 330 W Video Entertainment System D Operating Tips Chart 332 Sales Code XRV If Equipped 916 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Glove Compartment 040109768 5 Climate Controls 9 Fuel Door Release 6 Lower Switch Bank 10 Headlight Switch 7 Storage Bin 11 Hood Release 8 Ignition Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
382. ore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 2 Dry with a soft cloth component may be stamped on the inside cover other wise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart Seat Belt Maintenanc
383. ore another recall can be selected To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition s
384. ot sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Press the MENU button located on the steer NE 83 F ing wheel repeatedly until one of the follow BRAKE Cc ing displays in the EVIC Menu Button Adaptive Cruise Control Off E When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off C 23456 mi RS Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 032435496 When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument ACC SET cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The _ When ACC is set the set speed will display information it displays depends on ACC system status 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The set speed will continue to display in place of the e Distance Setting Change odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set e System Cancel Acquisition Loss of Target e Driver Override e System Off WMUZ The Light e AC
385. otection locks are engaged locked 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e f a passive entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours the passive entry feature for the handle may time out Pulling the deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle s passive entry feature e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the passive entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e f you unlock the doors using the passive entry door handles but do NOT pull the handle the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter wi
386. our active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States l l MRXCAWAMAA Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide
387. ow both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indi vidual comfort settings The controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control 045633440 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Controls e Driver Temperature Control 045633438 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the left front seat occupant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 e Passenger Temperature Control 045633441 NOTE Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment for the right front seat occupant Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fasci
388. ows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 022290770 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Liftgate Flipper Glass Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass the window switch located on the liftgate is open NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could
389. pants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469 NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump Start follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen precautions ger s front seat There are remote locations located under the hood to assist in jump starting CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 060833324 Remote Battery Posts Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post 470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition sw
390. perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer F
391. plate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 Af
392. position before the sunroof begins Express Open operation Venting Sunroof Express Press the center Vent button on the sunroof switch for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically vent fully open from any position then stop This is called Express Vent During Express Vent operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof If the shade is closed when the vent switch is pressed the shade will automatically move to the middle position before the sunroof begins Express Vent operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 Closing Sunroof Express Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second and release and the sunroof glass will automatically close from any position then stop This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second and release and the shade will automatically open then stop This is called Express Shade Open If the shade is forward of the middle position it will move to the middle position then stop If the shade is at or rearward of the middle position it will move to the full open position then stop During Express Shade Open opera tion any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade Closing Power Shade Express Press
393. pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the DEFROST mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows
394. pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission 5 7L only and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust sy
395. proper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 436 STARTING AND OPERATINC M CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem
396. r s if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Seatbelt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags
397. r if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod MP3 control iPod or external USB device mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod MP3 control mode audio tracks if avail able from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Play Mode When switched to iPod MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward
398. r N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert the key Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go fea ture the message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked or un locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob If the lock kn
399. r further information NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 e f the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front of you and OFF prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Air Suspension Up A The air suspension up telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Operating 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Air Suspension Down A The air suspension down telltale will illumi nate when the air suspension is in use For further information refer to Starting And Op erating e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system determines 8 7 install
400. r know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any c
401. r minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The ventilated seat switches are used to control the speed of the fans located in the seat Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated 030905581 NOTE The engine must
402. r overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors D Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors o Outside Mirrors Folding Feature D Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped 0 Outside Power Mirrors o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 110 B Sun Visor Extension If Equipped 110 ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 111 ARear Cross DOE uu aepdebscbant qr PE eS ed 117 O Modes Of Operation 2 acies deiode x enone 118 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 119 ll Voice Command If Equipped 120 ic m 120 O Power Seats If Equipped 120 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Passenger s Power Seat 22104424 5933 O Power Lumbar If Equipped O Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment o Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline 132 er Rs O Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped o Heated Seats If Equipped O Ventilated Seats If Equipped 0 Head Restraints E160 740 Split Rear Seat s asame de 64 eth EH Rech Rear Seat 4 lt 64 jseavaha
403. rans in NEUTRAL e Trans in PARK e 30 mph max 48 km h e T case in NEUTRAL e 15 miles 24 km max distance Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow NOT ALLOWED Flatbed BEST METHOD BEST METHOD en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 475 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override under Starting and Operating Automatic Transmission for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not in the LOCK position Towing Without the Ignition K
404. rate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If t
405. ration The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu ally e If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the re
406. re lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Refer to Keyless
407. red to Uconnect Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB phone system but just one can be selected and played device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Controlling BTSA using Radio Buttons To get into the BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press VR button and say Bluetooth Stream Selecting different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say name of the audio device or ask Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BISA device Only the current song that is playing will display info Uconnect Multimedia SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio Uconnect studio SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video chan nels for family entertainment directly from its satellites and broadcasti
408. requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 031 in 0 79 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sg Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case 3 6L Engine Transfer Case 5 7L Engine MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API or equivalent with friction modifier additive Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine With MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD GL5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 5 7L Engine Without MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 API Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD GL5 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DO
409. ress and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is gra
410. rmation power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position With the Keyless Enter N Go feature opening the driv er s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the re minder chime to sound Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the veh
411. rocking motion Move the shift lever the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight gear normal fifth gear until the transmission fluid pressure to the accelerator amp ERPIREGOD ian oar Warn NOTE The Electronic Stability Control ESC and Trac e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the tion Control System TCS if equipped should be turned first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due tothe Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Op ra fluid partially draining from the torque converter into erating for further information the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheat ing and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION When rocking a stu
412. rs are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc Sensor Location Driver Side Shown 030409806 The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors 4 Warning Light Location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 The BSM system can also be configured to sound an audible chime alert and reduces the radio volume to notify the driver of objects that have entered the detec tion zones Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehic
413. rt the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in zm negative post of the booster battery 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper remote negative post of the discharged vehicle cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not
414. ry loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator
415. s ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 ACC 74 mph DISTANCE 1 ram ACC 74 mph DISTANCE 2 MESSA 56789 mi 56789 mi L4 Gi liy 032435495 RS 032435548 Distance Setting 1 Distance Setting 2 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is n
416. s To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mir ror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automati cally adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirrors will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Outside Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To ad
417. s If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet 034609808 mai Front Power Outlet In addition to the front power outlet there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 f 034609793 Center Console Outlet Rear Power Outlet The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo WARNING area To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers e Close the lid when not in use and while driving vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the the vehicle battery even more quickly Only use these inter e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an mittently and with greater caution electric shock and failure After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the ge
418. s Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you
419. s not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stoppin
420. s 3 99 SRI 40 em oe 428 Common Towing Detinibons acid Gates aa 409 E Trailer Hitch Classification auae 9 cm s E soe sds gus 9 Goa ee has ee ee 429 vrina Mag cn ight Ratings 442 ce a a donde kii O Trailer And Tongue Weight 443 Replacement Parts 24222 ed RR esr 430 5 Towing Requirements sss AAA O MGIMCHANCe 3 x ug od hao 9 15 9 E Pack ada 430 EIOWIBS HIPS icis aodcdrde de eee ead ad ord 449 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ee E Snow Plow 0 0 0 eee ee 450 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 45 o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 451 D Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive NOUO 2 uctus 35 602 be Gand ed d dod d SG 452 O Recreational Towing Quadra Trac I9 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Model s cameos 9o 2 eet PEE ed 452 O Recreational Towing Quadra rac II9 Quadra Drive II Four Wheel Drive Models leen 453 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child co
421. s and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer l8 548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer AB to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident CSOmmrmcommZon mo2zrames IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per hues Gas eee eee ee eG aos 551 O Prepare For The Appointment 551 APrepare A List 64444 fevered apne ade aes 551 o Be Reasonable With Requests Jal W If You Need Assistance 551
422. s the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Tire Termin
423. sher solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain
424. sions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the batte
425. sition in fifth gear the first tap to the left will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 D Applies to vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear for 3 6L engine fourth and fifth gears for 5 7L engine The transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive if the following condi tions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for opera
426. soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup under Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volt
427. sped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the MEMORY switch on the driver s door trim panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the SELECT button a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver ve
428. ss to reinstall the liftgate trim MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the license lamp lens 2 Pull bulb from socket 3 Replace bulb 4 Reinstall lens 073310730 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES C un Metric 24 Gallons 6 Quarts 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts Cooling System 91 Liters 5 6 Liters 6 6 Liters 3 6L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 15 4 Quarts 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Pack age 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 16 Quarts 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 14 6 Liters 15 2 Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the
429. ssing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have a collision Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in WARNING light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you system It is not a substitute for active dr
430. stem Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes
431. straint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
432. stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer
433. t Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Refer to Child Restraints Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more All hould al heir houl occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder severe injuries in a collision The airbags work belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all back as far as practical to allow the Adva
434. t information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be ri
435. t of the driver s door 031309526 Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left CAUTION and lift the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031309527 Safety Latch Location 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight Headlight Switch Z switch clockwise When the headlight switch is The headlight switch is located on the left side of the ip the parking lights taillights license plate instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light and instrument panel lights are also light switch controls the operation of the headlights turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and SWitch back to the O Off position fog lights if equipped NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and th
436. t or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 10
437. t read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010809610 EE INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS un Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 14 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 ARV GOR PETRI 15 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 16 H Key In Ignition Reminder 18 Nu Key cusosortiesesvieO Rete ks 18 O Replacement Keys d va m sti ir ded n 19 O Customer Key Programming 20 O General Information ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped B Rearming The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System s 4 oi ire es Bi illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE H To Unlock The Doors
438. t seats t 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side 022634366 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Location NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during WARNING depl t could to b ly injured eployment could cause you to be severely injured or f If your vehicle is equipped with left and right killed i l Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners SAB SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle high enough to block the location of the SABIC may deploy The area where the SABIC is located should re The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both main free from any obstructions front and rear seat occupants that are
439. t to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 TIRE 35 PSI 81971362 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 34 HN 420 STARTING AND OPERATING xe message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compo nent an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure
440. t trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary LLLILLLLLLDL M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 miles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the
441. take the force in a collision belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc v Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Removing Slack from Belt Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap 6 To release the belt p
442. td 4a ee A O27 Seat Belt Reminder 249 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 252 onde M MEET 524 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 244 Side Marker 223 s aos acp dore de ded B RC PU 527 SmartBeams 4 45 42 6 444 449 bode od ERG GHGS 146 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 247 Tow Haul Indicator 24362 REG URS 246 Traction Control 570 INDEX M Tun Signal 2424 oe ee She oeoe ease 97 144 525 527 VOID MITOL 34 9 8 doe cC 9h 454 bho tee eo 110 Loading Vellele 3 quos preiar r sees saunas 433 UES eed aes 396 og c eee o TIT 32 Chile DEDOS us s arasti vd 9 CR P ss 34 o PTT LUTTE 22 DOWEL DOOR 4 44 spo 9 due ime eR A RUE SHH dores 33 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren RICH cuc 9er ot sons Soldier Sero ee Cd pde 04 86 Lubrication DOO phic done O3 EP A AFP REUS 494 Maintenance Free Battery 445 os oc gw restos 491 Maintenance Procedures 5 486 Maintenance Schedule 4i 22x2 9h es 534 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 244484 Manual Service s ox bxeEGomG REGES EE 43 555 Memory Feature Memory Seat 138 hu siege m 138 Memory Seats and Radio 2 svo 443 49 138 Meal 2644 rerep kee ete eae Fone es 423 Wit T0 CODDDUISE 2 20 054 25 peste hea i 270 aoi Tr 106 Automon DOMINE seisa ora dob a et ah ed 107 Electric Powered a 2oescs 9 dodoe dae meg don e eb o 109 EIECHICIROIBDIO 2626 44 44 45 44 Pd E RUPEE 109 Exterior Folding 46
443. te the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind the gap panel Please note the top tether anchor ages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintena
444. ter adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL
445. ter display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC mes sages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center 11 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires
446. the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle afte
447. the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Lamps 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connec tor 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing CAUTION e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing
448. the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise
449. the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To disable the window controls on the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again 021909603 Window Lockout Button ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the wind
450. thin 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if there is
451. this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer
452. tion at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmis sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis sion cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051210681 TOW HAUL
453. tion is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel d H Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up ap proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature COMMAND VIEW SUNROO
454. tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still 414 STARTING AND OPERATING xe be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been Sonne e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will value prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have NOTE been established for the tire size equipped on your e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire damage may result when using replacement failure or condition equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance bea
455. to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation or all of the following may occur continues see your doctor If these particles settle on lothing follow th i s in e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra x on cdi ux eee sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front 5 LES passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed If you are involve
456. to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of tra
457. tomatic ATC 324 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 209 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 84 Thet System ATMUNS 3 6 54 es EA Eee ee ve as 21 Ihet System Disarming cue 44 an 4 ome tee m 22 Tie Down Hooks Cargo a es4 SER CRUS os 292 Jut Steering COMM s tee deben reet Re en 158 159 Tire and Loading Information Placard 396 Tire Identification Number TIN 394 TEMIS seme ones hse AERE OE EO 390 Tine Safety Informauon a2 oc dedo moe o9 s 390 is ee ee ee re ee eee ee ee 97 400 557 ANTEE P 401 Oi ae ee ee ee ee ee ee ee E 409 CHANGING P Bae ek oe eos oe ee em ees 461 COIBDACE pate iouis dS oe Be ee A ERES 404 General Information 122 d reme s 400 zie Ee O 1 ius edges pF UG CES EP ES 403 faton Pressures 2s s edes terit Re B eR d 401 IG reer eera sae qud wap M EE 461 LiteOn CS Pr 407 OAC Cape Seon eee 9 26 BS ee Ses 396 397 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 412 Pressure Warning Licht 2440 4 a94e560 5 5 247 Oualib Gradio a 94 3 399 3 49 9 9439 19 4 ghar x 557 Kadal M R 403 Replacement EN 408 RGUQHON 3 3 Gas 44 0445445 54545 UR EE Fe 411 DIG Vanes oes se oe ee hee eae e ee oe 390 27 Cr 392 en INDEX 577 DOW THES 2 548 nant aa Ss eee eo EREET 411 Opare lG 445 ey5e ooo ees Kee Oe ORES 462 SPINNING PP C m 406 Tread Wear Indicators less 407 Wheel WOMENS vsus et d obra x ee bare vds 467 Ton
458. track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD a If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD play
459. tractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control
460. trol takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Q y ON OFF CANCEL 2 RES 3 SET 1 ON OFF 4 CANCEL NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground be
461. u striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Latch Plate 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch adjust the seat plate into the buckle until
462. uch damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber s
463. uld cause a collision with another f you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver standing Your Instrument Panel for further information is responsible for braking the vehicle down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Ready Alert Braking If Equipped Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support If Equipped Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will period
464. uld operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go ae This feature allows the driver to oper
465. unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and
466. ur Vehicle if equipped Coolant low Service air suspension system Oil change due Key in ignition Lights on Key in Ignition Lights On Ignition or Accessory On Ignition or Accessory On Lights On Turn signal on Park assist on Warning object detected Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Remote start disabled System fault Remote start disabled Turn key Remote start active Key to Run Memory 1 profile set Memory 2 profile set Memory system unavailable Not in Park Memory system unavailable Seatbelt buckled Memory 1 profile recall Memory 2 profile recall Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Function currently unavailable Power Liftgate Unlock to operate Power Liftgate Put in Park to operate Power Liftgate Automatic high beams on Automatic high beams off Service Four Wheel Drive System Four Wheel Drive System in neutral ECO Fuel Saver Indicator TERRAIN SETTINGS AUTOMATIC TERRAIN SETTINGS ROCK TERRAIN SETTINGS SAND MUD TERRAIN SETTINGS SNOW TERRAIN SETTINGS SPORT 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Proce
467. use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 406 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are
468. ush the red button on the buckle shoulder belt The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the button verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature
469. utes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 55 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console 030909669 Rear Heated Seat Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first fou
470. ve the shift lever override access cover located on the bottom of the cupholder 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Using the screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the shift lock lever down 7 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and install the rubber liner into the cupholder TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or loss of proper tie down tension Towing Condition Wheels OFF 2WD Models 4WD Models the Ground See instructions in Recreational Tow If transmission is operable ing under Starting and Operating Flat Tow e
471. vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed This feature will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To engage or disengage the Child Protection Door Lock system 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021806189 Child Protection Door Lock Function Child Protection Door Lock Location WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Pr
472. vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 10 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC e You engage Four Wheel Drive Low If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the
473. vice may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 21
474. vs 489 Engine Oil Viscosity Charl vey eae Seq S essa 489 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 76 Entry System Illuminated vevnyuctoleee ven 22 Ind OE EE pee ee E E E 423 Event Data Recorder wide tt owus pee P9 mig 9 9 eo 79 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 47 94 426 Exhaust DUSIOB 44s au roma Sta oa seas 94 497 Exterior Finish Care unes aux beet ues eee ees 919 EXICHOF LIS Rx ace uh eer 6b iS 2 R9 sean eas 97 Filters Pu Cleaner Loue hush oases ewe ts REPE os 490 liri rm 490 Eucine OI DISPOSAL eos kw RR oe gy TERES USES 490 Fish Care o 24 4245 44G boo bee aa eee prii 513 FaN 239 440 0935 2225 eee 95 eee us 460 Hazard Warning o pn caos in de dr 3x ach Rn 460 TEL SIS acea sa vord pep eee 97 246 525 527 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cilsme Range pP X 429 Poom QII 226 24 4446 084 RSS 80 4850 44264 429 Fuel Requirements o 0 44 60 geensuen vet 426 428 Maintenance 0 00 ce eee eens 430 Replacement Pals tasty so oo een ond Foe 430 DUM i2 ee habe en eee ech eee ee eee 429 Fupper Glass LIESaFe eundum x dene may eas d Flooded Engine Starting 2 00094 i lt ese0505444 343 Puid CapaCiles ses spama iay E S 530 Fiad Leako 22 4 epee ak ve he Soe ES bee Ge Y Ed 97 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 509 510 511 DIQKe 22292592923 ee ee ote ee ee eae ees 505 566 INDEX M Esse Ol 522 errre rae 487 Power DIEGO 565 556 Pi bc ESAE eres d 2 5 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts
475. will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is located e 3 6L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Key Ignition Park Interlock into any forward gear when the engine is above This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter idle speed lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position is firmly on the brake pedal The
476. witch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in fron
477. witch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle
478. you hear a click 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Latch Plate to Buckle Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug 3 WARNING Continued belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous accident Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the WARNING vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat your strongest bones will

Chrysler 11WK741-126-AB Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents